background image

Comprehensive Collection of Papers on English as a Second Language

Dr. Patricia A. Alvara

June, 2003

background image
background image

Table of Contents

QUESTION 1

3

Qualitative Versus Quantitative Research

5

Action Research

11

Case Studies

13

Experimental Designs

17

Surveys

20

           The Crawford-slip Method

24

           Cross-Impact Analysis

25

           Scenario Planning

27

           The Delphi Technique and Survey

29

           Morphological Analysis

30

           Trend Exploration

32

           Conclusion

32

References

36

QUESTION 2

43

           Funding Newcomers Programs

54

           Federal Regulations

56

           Additional Research 

59

           Exemplar Newcomers Programs

60

           Kenosha Unified School District

66

           Conclusion

71

           References

74

QUESTION 3

80

           The Bilingual Movement

80

           Program Effectiveness

87

           Conclusion

107

           References

111

QUESTION 4

121

           Standardized Assessments

122

           Advantages and Limitations

124

           Standardized Tests and LEP Students

126

           LEP Students and Language Levels

133

           Alternative/Authentic Assessments

138

background image

           Conclusion

143

           Appendix A

146

References

147

QUESTION 5

152

           Brain Research

153

           The Brain and Language Acquisition

156

           Classroom Instruction and Language Acquisition

161

           SDAIE

177

           CALLA

181

           Conclusion

183

           References

186

QUESTION 6

191

           Technology-based Learning Inception

194

           Internet/Intranet-based Training

196

           Web/Computer-based Training

198

           Technology-based Learning and Education

200

           Technology-based Learning Effectiveness

202

           Technology-based Learning Limitations

204

           Conclusion

206

           Model Course Rationale                                              

209

           Model Course Access

211

References

212

background image

QUESTION 1

Compare action research, case studies, experimental designs, surveys, Crawford-slip method, 
cross-impact analysis, scenario planning, Delphi techniques and surveys, morphological 
analysis, and trend exploration, which have been used to evaluate the effectiveness of language 
assistance programs during the last decade.  What methodologies are most effective for teachers’ 
usage?  What methodologies might best be used for research in developing a comparative 
analysis of effective Sheltered English programs? 

Bilingual programs are currently being closely examined by many sectors of society, due 

in large part to the criticisms being directed at them from the media and several influential 

organizations.  Effective bilingual programs require leadership to find answers to the calls for 

greater accountability.  Obtaining adequate research on bilingual and English as Second language 

(ESL) educational programs has been a long, arduous process due to the vast differences in these 

programs.  Bilingual and ESL educational research is often skewed due to the wide range of 

latitude among Federal requirements, which allow states to select the most effective programs for 

their limited English proficient (LEP) student population.  State officials, educational agencies, 

and courts have further established mandated guidelines on educating, governing, and managing 

LEP students.  The actual programs being offered can vary from state to state, district to district, 

school to school, and classroom to classroom (Amrein & Pena, 2000; Hakuta, 2002).

While the efficacy of language programs remains a widely debated topic 
in educational discourse, researchers agree that language programs do not 
exist within a vacuum, and that the benefits accrued by participating in 
these programs are likely to differ for individual students.   (Amrein & 
Pena, 2000, p.2)

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Educational researchers, linguists, and bilingual educators such as Cummins (1999), Freeman 

(1996), and Hakuta (2002) have different perspectives on bilingual programs and their 

effectiveness.  Bilingual research is often tainted with program bias; this bias depends on the 

program of preference and study (Amrein & Pena, 2000).

Limited English Proficient (LEP) is the legal term used to identify students who were not 

born in the United States, or whose native language is not English, and those students who 

cannot participate effectively in regular classrooms because they lack fluency in spoken and 

written English (Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  LEP is the term recognized by the 

Office of Civil Rights (OCR), and the term used throughout this comprehensive paper to refer to 

these students (Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  Bilingual is a generalized term that refers 

to all programs other than English as a Second Language (ESL).  In this paper, the term bilingual 

includes all Language Assistance Programs (LAP) offered within the Kenosha Unified School 

District: Dual Immersion, Transitional Bilingual Education (TBE), English as a Second 

Language (ESL), and Sheltered English Immersion (SEI).  Although ESL and SEI are not 

commonly referred to as bilingual programs, they are the most commonly used methods of 

instruction for LEP students nationwide.  

“Bilingual education was initially implemented to address political, social, economical, 

and educational injustices; it instead remains a powerful instrument of mainstreaming minority-

language students” (Akkari, 1998, p.1).  These programs were created to address various issues 

and to help bridge the educational gap.  The definition of “bridging the achievement gap” in this 

comprehensive paper refers to increasing LEP students’ achievement in English language 

proficiency-orally, in reading, and in writing, so that these abilities are shown to be more 

4

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

comparable to those of mainstreamed native English speaking students.  Today, in virtually all 

grade levels in all subjects, African American, Latino, and American Indian students perform far 

behind others.  As the Hispanic and LEP student populations continue to increase rapidly, the 

achievement gap continues to widen; this gap is due to the complexity of the issues surrounding 

these students.  “The gaps are so pronounced that in 1996, several national tests found African-

American and Hispanic 12th graders scoring at roughly the same levels in reading and math as 

white 8th graders” (Johnston & Viadero, 2002, pp. 18-19).  

To clearly understand the future of bilingual education, researchers should examine the 

current research and methodologies pertaining to SEI.  Sheltered English Immersion can be 

broken down into four types of programs: Submersion, ESL, Sheltered Immersion, and 

Transitional Bilingual Education (TBE).  Today, available research on Sheltered English 

Immersion (SEI) is minimal; however, it is now beginning to surface due to the passage of new 

laws in California, Arizona, and Massachusetts and with the federal "No Child Left Behind Act 

of 2001.”  These laws call for an organized effort to educate all children, regardless of their 

ability to speak and understand English.  Limited data on SEI are due to the restrictions and 

limitations placed on these programs by the federal government, which has made it rather 

difficult to implement SEI programs (Gersten, Taylor, Woodward, & Wite, 1997).  Despite the 

challenges, SEIs programs have become increasingly common in the United States, and 

particularly in Canada, where the federal restrictions are absent (Gersten et al., 1997).     

Multiple research methodologies have been utilized in bilingual education as tools to 

understand this overwhelming process and even to bring about changes within the bilingual 

education arena.  In this realm of education, the pendulum continues to swing and is continually 

5

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

being inundated with seemingly endless changes.  The focus of this paper is to provide a brief 

overview of the various types of qualitative and quantitative research methodologies that can be 

used in the development of a comparative analysis which will determine the effectiveness of 

Kenosha Unified School District’s SEI and Transitional Bilingual Educational programs (K-5) in 

meeting its LEP students’ English language needs.  More specifically, this paper will examine 

action research, case studies, experimental designs, surveys, Crawford-slip method, cross-impact 

analysis, scenario planning, Delphi techniques and surveys, morphological analysis, and trend 

exploration as methods of identifying the District’s Language Assistance Programs’(LAP) 

strengths and weaknesses.

Qualitative Versus Quantitative Research 

Qualitative research incorporates a variety of methodologies that are often combined 

and/or overlapped, as in action research and case studies.  Qualitative research is usually 

contrasted with quantitative research.  The focus of qualitative research is not on numbers but on 

words and observations; stories, visual portrayals, meaningful characterizations, interpretations, 

and other expressive descriptions (Zikmund, 2000).  Alternately, the purpose of quantitative 

research is to determine the quantity or extent of some phenomenon in the form of numbers 

(Burnaford, Fischer, & Hobson, 2001; Gall, Borg, Walter, & Gall, 1996; Kerlin, 1999; Mc Bride 

& Schostak, 2000; Meloy, 2002; The Qualitative Versus Quantitative Analysis, 2003; The 

Qualitative Versus Quantitative Debate, 2003).  

6

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Qualitative analysis is a process that is often the precursor to quantitative, 
statistical work; a process  to make the tacit underpinnings of an issue 
explicit; a process you can use to deepen your understanding of complex 
social   and   human   factors   that   cannot   be   understood   with   numbers;   a 
process  that helps you  figure out what to count and what to measure. 
(Kerlin, 1999 p.  1)  

The focus of qualitative research is on words and observations, and may include 

stories, visual portrayals, meaningful characterizations, interpretations, and other 

expressive descriptions.  Interviews are often used in qualitative research.  Alternatively, 

quantitative research is used to determine the extent of some phenomenon in the form of 

numbers.  Researchers Miles and Huberman, in Qualitative Data Analysis (2003), stated 

the following: 

Qualitative   data   involve   words   and   quantitative   data   involve   numbers; 
there are some researchers who feel that one is better (or more scientific) 
than   the   other.     Another   major   difference   between   the   two   is   that 
qualitative research is inductive and quantitative research is deductive.  In 
qualitative   research,   a   hypothesis   is   not   needed   to   begin   research. 
However, all quantitative research requires a hypothesis before research 
can begin.  (p.1)

Qualitative research uses a combination of strategies to collect data: field observations, 

focus groups, intensive interviews, and/or case studies.  In a qualitative study, the researcher 

conducts studies in the field, in natural surroundings, and tries to capture the normal flow of 

events without trying to control extraneous variables.  Theories emerge as part of the research 

process, evolving from the data as they are collected  (Burnaford et al., 2001; Gall et al., 1996; 

Hill, 2000; Mc Bride & Schostak, 2000; Meloy, 2002; The Qualitative Versus Quantitative 

Debate, 2003; Wimmer & Dominick, 1994).  The design of a study evolves during the research 

7

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

and can often be adjusted or changed as it progresses, which is not a characteristic of quantitative 

research.  It may be an exploratory research study or a quantitative descriptive study. 

 

descriptive study seeks to answer those “what is?” or “what are?” questions, and data are 

collected through numbers, words or both (Zikmund, 2000). 

In quantitative research, researchers conduct experiments, classify data, and construct 

more complex statistical analysis in an attempt to explain what was discovered; although, a 

researcher may conduct  non-controlled quantitative studies such as descriptive, correlational, ex 

post facto, and evaluation.  Findings are generalized to a larger population, and direct 

comparisons are also made.  This is one of the main disadvantages of using qualitative research; 

the results are not often extended to wider populations with the same degree of certainty as in 

quantitative analyses.  The results of the research are not usually tested to determine if they are 

statistically significant or due to chance (Burnaford et al., 2001; Gall et al., 1996; Kerlin, 1999; 

Mc Bride & Schostak, 2000; Meloy, 2002; The Qualitative Versus Quantitative Analysis, 2003; 

The Qualitative Versus Quantitative Debate, 2003).  

It could be argued that the quantitative researcher is more precise, but the 
response would be that with people it is not possible to be so precise, 
people change and the social situation is too complex for numerical 
description…Quantitative research has a tendency to clarify where 
clarification is not appropriate. (Mc Bride& Schostak, 2000, pp. 1-2)  

Quantitative data can determine when students have achieved or failed a task, and they can 

provide national ranking, percentiles, and allow researchers to conduct comparison analyses. 

Nevertheless, they cannot provide the “total” picture of why a particular student has either 

succeeded or failed (Burnaford et al., 2001; Gall et al., 1996; Mc Bride & Schostak, 2000; 

8

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Meloy, 2002; The Qualitative Versus Quantitative Analysis, 2003; The Qualitative Versus 

Quantitative Debate, 2003).  

Qualitative research has a phenomenological focus that can provide an enriched and 

detailed description of the participants’ actions and/or viewpoints (Veronesi, 1997).  Qualitative 

research tends to incorporate a more humanistic approach.  When conducting qualitative 

research, one is often interested in determining the ‘whole’ picture; he/she is in search of 

answering the “why” questions (Burnaford et al., 2001; Gall et al., 1996; Kerlin, 1999; Mc Bride 

& Schostak, 2000; Meloy, 2002).  

The role of the researcher is also different when comparing qualitative and quantitative 

research.  In quantitative research, the researcher neither participates in nor influences what is 

being studied; thus, he/she examines the circumstances objectively.  In some qualitative research, 

the researcher may play a more subjective role and participate by being immersed in his/her 

research.  That is, the observer may be the teacher or the facilitator.  This role is often the case 

with when action research, case studies, and focus groups are used in educational research.     

In   qualitative   research,   we   seek   to   minimize   the   impact   of   our 
interventions, but also recognize that there are other ways in which we 
intervene…. Yet, we can have a pretty good idea that these may be helpful 
to   us   in   certain   situations.     More   importantly,   we   endeavor   to   ‘build 
theory’   from   the   ground   of   experience   or   practice.     For   qualitative 
researchers,   the   context   in   which   practices   takes   place   has   important 
bearing upon that practice and research should be rooted accordingly.  (Mc 
Bride & Schostak, 2000, p. 2)  

Therefore, both qualitative and quantitative research studies are valuable in the field of 

education.  Both may be utilized to understand the effectiveness of the various programs in place. 

9

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

In conducting a comparative analysis of Sheltered English Immersion programs, researchers may 

select a multi-method or mixed methods methodology by collecting quantitative and qualitative 

data to be better able to identify the “total” picture of the research problem.  A qualitative 

observation may be used to watch the teachers in action, while a quantitative survey may be 

given to teachers to assess effectiveness.  For the purpose of this comprehensive paper, each type 

of assessment examined will be identified as qualitative, quantitative, or a combination of both. 

Action Research

Action research is a powerful qualitative research tool utilized in education.  Educators 

who use this method of research observe carefully and reflect systematically.  Observational 

techniques are used to improve their practice.  Researchers then generate potential solutions to 

original problems, implement a chosen intervention, assess the outcomes, and/or modify the 

solution(s).  Action implies the need for change and research implies a need to clarify or increase 

understanding.  Action research is an iterative research process in which the researcher develops 

policy, brings about change, and/or promotes quality improvement within the educational realm. 

This type of research is a cyclical process that allows educators to create projects within their 

classrooms and modify them as needed (Burnaford et al., 2001;

 

Knezevik, 2003; Mc Bride & 

Schostak, 2000). 

A group of English as Second Language (ESL) teachers may seek a collaborative change 

and implement their research.  The process may include a general plan of action needed for 

implementation, the collection, and analysis of the data, and monitoring of these steps.  The data 

may be reported using a variety of methods including: direct observation, surveys, ethnographic 

10

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

questionnaires, journals, or various other artifacts.  Researchers must check for the validity of 

their information, and determine whether the information gathered is transferable to the general 

population, or if it is limited to the practices studied (its external reliability).  In addition to 

external reliability, researchers must examine the internal consistency of the methodology to 

ensure that the research is free from bias and is ethical.  In the area of data analysis, researchers 

need to explain how data will be coded, will be identified, and/or determine how themes will be 

tracked (Burnaford et al., 2001;

 

Knezevik, 2003; Mc Bride & Schostak, 2000).    

 

A team, comprised of eleven teachers within the New York School District PS24/District 

15,

 

collaborated with the Development and Dissemination Schools Initiative to conduct action 

research.  The team investigated how to improve instruction and other services for its LEP 

students by integrating its low-proficiency second language students into Interactive Read Aloud 

activities.  During its initial meetings, the team created and identified several possible 

adjustments and described how it would begin to implement these strategies in its ESL 

classrooms.  The PS24 Action Research Team arrived at a consensus to implement six 

instructional strategies.  Each teacher chose one new strategy to use in his/her classroom.  The 

principal then assigned a team liaison to observe and support the teachers during the 

implementation.  Additionally, the teachers were expected to keep a response journal.  The 

teachers met twice a month, after school, to report their progress; they discussed reading 

selections and reflected upon what was working or not working.  During these meetings, they 

also determined how they would display the data.  They agreed to use a written response in the 

form of journals to document their findings as a performance assessment.  The final outcome of 

their action research left teachers still pondering how to improve instruction for their LEP 

11

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

students.  The team discovered the strategies implemented in the classroom worked, but did not 

meet the students' immediate instructional needs.  They felt their time would have been better 

spent researching and investigating the following: How do classroom teachers get their LEP 

students to pass the state and district exams (D&D School Initiative, PS24, 2000)? 

Out of the eight action research projects generated through the Development and 

Dissemination Schools Initiative website, not one project generated nor documented extensive 

conclusions to warrant policy or strategic changes.  In conducting a comparative analysis of 

Sheltered English Immersion programs, action research may be utilized to understand teachers’ 

perceptions and attitudes towards their LAPs' strengths and weaknesses.  By collaborating, 

teachers may be able to identify the critical areas that need to be addressed, create a plan, 

implement the plan, and monitor it.  Most importantly, the current research further speculates 

that for action research to be an effective and valid model of research for LAP improvement 

there must be a critical analysis of the full results.  Otherwise, a project's reliability and validity 

cannot be guaranteed (Burnaford et al., 2001 D&D School Initiative, PS24, 2000; Knezevik, 

2003; Mc Bride & Schostak, 2000).  Careful planning and critical analysis of action research 

may result in a practical application of policy and strategic changes.  The research design must 

be flexible enough to change directions or plan future research that addresses the needs of the 

LEP student population. 

Case Studies

12

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Case studies are one of the most widely used forms of qualitative research in education. 

“Researchers generally do case studies for one of three purposes: to produce detailed 

descriptions of a phenomenon, to develop possible explanations of it, or to evaluate the 

phenomenon” (Gall et al., 1996, p. 549).  Robert Kirk and Jerome Miller define this type of 

research as “watching people in their own territory and interacting” (cited in Gall et al., 1996, p. 

547).  Case studies often involve a scientific approach, in which a hypothesis is studied, as a 

reaction to a perceived limitation of qualitative research.  

Kimberly Hill (2000), author of Beyond the Numbers: A Case Study of the 1990 Census 

Promotion Program and the Implications for Census 2000, stated that Case studies are best 

suited for ‘how’ and ‘why’ research questions, when the researcher has no control over 

behavioral events and wants to focus on contemporary events” (p.1).  These types of qualitative 

studies can investigate any phenomenon that interests the researcher within the participant’s 

natural setting; they are often conducted from the perspective of the participants.  The 

phenomenon under study can be identified as: a role, a process, an event, a concept, a person(s), 

a program, and/or a curriculum (Gall et al., 1996; Mc Bride & Schostak, 2000).  

“In conducting case studies, researchers collect intensive data about a particular instance 

of a phenomenon, and they seek to understand each instance on its own terms and in its own 

context” (Gall et al., 1996, p.  541). According to these authors, case studies have four 

characteristics:

(1) the study of phenomena by focusing on specific instances, that is,  cases; 
(2) an in-depth study of each case; 
(3) the study of a phenomenon in its natural context; and 

13

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

(4) the study of emic [participant’s viewpoint] perspective of case study 

participants (p.  545).     

In a case study, data are collected and analyzed.  The data collected can be in any form 

gathered over a given period of time and may include words, images, physical objects, 

quantitative data, narratives and/or interview transcripts.  Kimberly Hill (2000) explained that a 

case study may use “as many data sources as possible to systematically investigate individuals, 

groups, organizations, or events, and is the best method when a researcher seeks to understand or 

explain a phenomenon” (p.1).  The methodology employed to examine the data vary according to 

the needs of the researcher.  “Case study researchers might begin a case study with one method 

of data collection and gradually add or shift to other methods.  Use of multiple methods to collect 

data…can enhance the validity of case study findings through triangulation” (Gall et al., 1996, p. 

557).     

Researchers conducting case studies could use descriptions and explanations to attempt to 

build, describe, and conceptualize the phenomenon.  Researchers may conduct a single–site 

phenomenological case study by examining the attitudes and perceptions of an ESL teacher, 

his/her LEP students, colleagues, and principal towards an integrated curriculum or thematic 

teaching in an ESL classroom as a method of building LEP students’ academic content 

knowledge.  This single-site case study might examine the experiences, perceptions, and 

interactions between the ESL teacher and his/her LEP students.  The study may contribute to the 

understanding of why ESL teachers should use integrated curriculum to build academic content 

knowledge and may provide an in-depth analysis of how an ESL teacher would implement and 

perceive teaching thematically.  Data may be produced from interview transcripts, observations, 

14

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

journal entries, language assessments, and other documents to monitor and track the progress of 

the LEP students.  Based on the data presented, researchers would search for themes and/or 

patterns, which could be used to determine significant characteristics featured throughout the 

case (Gall et al., 1996; Mc Bride & Schostak, 2000; Veronesi, 1997).

A good depiction will provide a thick description…statements re-create a 
situation and as much of its context as possible, accompanied by the 
meanings and intentions inherent in that situation.  The term thick 
description originated in anthropology and is referenced as a complete, 
literal description of a cultural phenomenon.  (Gall et al., 1996, p.  541)

Peter Veronesi (1997) conducted a case study called A Case Study of Alternative 

Assessment: Student, Teacher, and Observer perceptions in a Ninth Grade Biology Classroom. 

In his qualitative descriptive case study, he examined the perceptions of a veteran biology 

teacher and his ninth grade biology students towards alternative science assessments strategies. 

The methodology used was from a phenomenological perspective that described the experiences 

of the participants within their own “complex, cultural setting” (p.  3). The purpose of the study 

was to contribute to the understanding of implementing alternative science assessments by 

providing an in-depth analysis of how the teacher implemented and perceived alternative 

assessments.  Data were derived from various sources such as interview transcripts, observations 

and other artifacts.  

Analysis of the data was not intended to support or refute claims made in 
the name of alternative assessment.  Rather, this study was intended to 
provide a vivid description of the situation studies and delineate potential 
implications for using alternative science assessments.  (p. 2)  

15

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Veronesi’s use of descriptions allowed him to be an “outside” observer; his descriptions mirrored 

those of the participants rather than the researcher.  The results described in this case study were 

not conclusive, nor were they ever compared to those of other science teachers and/or classes.

Experimental Designs

Experimental designs are the most powerful quantitative research method used in 

education.  This type of design is used to establish cause-and-effect relationships among two or 

more variables.  In order to be classified as an effective experiment, the research must be 

conducted in a rigorous manner in which the researcher tries to control confounding factors that 

threaten its internal and external validity.  Controlled experiments in bilingual education are 

almost impossible to conduct and often produce undesirable results (Meyers & Feinberg, 1992; 

Ramirez, Ramey, & Yuen, 1991).  LEP students are seldom placed randomly in their language 

programs; all too often, these students have various language and academic abilities.  

The attrition rate contributes to the ineffectiveness of controlled experiments (Amselle & 

Chavez, 1997; Garcia, 2002; Kerper Mora, 2002; Meyers & Feinberg, 1992; Ramirez et al., 

1991).  “Attrition rates are high due to academic and behavioral difficulties.  By sixth grade 43% 

to 68% of students transfer from the regular L1 [primary language] program.  About 75% of 

students who transfer out will repeat a grade” (Kerper Mora, 2002, p. 1).  LEP students tend to 

be transient; their high mobility rate may be due to the mere fact that LEP students are often 

placed in bilingual classrooms until they reach a level of fluency; they are then reclassified or re-

designated and placed into a mainstreamed classroom (Garcia, 2002).  Once LEP students are 

16

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

reclassified or re-designated as fluent English proficient (FEP), school districts tend to halt the 

monitoring process of their FEP students (Amselle & Chavez, 1997).  

In bilingual education, researchers using experimental design will often disseminate a pre 

and post language assessment and/or have a controlled group.  Most often, this design method is 

used for used by the researcher to draw a specific causal conclusion.  “If one concludes that 

when a school follows approach X to bilingual education, the performance and achievement of 

students will be Y…that X causes Y” (Meyers & Feinberg, 1992, p.19).  Interventions may or 

may not be controlled by the researcher.  A critical problem encountered when implementing this 

type of research is determining whether a change in the post-test is due to the treatment and not 

to extraneous variables.  Confounding variables thus weaken the experiment (Gall et al., 1996; 

Meyers & Fienberg, 1992; The Qualitative Versus Quantitative Debate, 2003).  

Quasi-experiments are very much like the true experiment with the exception of subject 

assignment; they are used when the effects of the secondary variables are not known but are 

assumed, such as the lack of random sampling in education because of legal and ethical issues 

presented when working with students.  That is, subjects have been found to be in certain groups 

and are then studied; they are not assigned to different groups.  Quasi-experiments use theory to 

determine which factor needs to be ruled out as a possible alternative explanation for the effects 

observed.  The design allows for more causal inferences than uncontrolled qualitative 

observational studies.  Control is a critical factor in experimental design; experimental control 

determines the quality of the experiment, and can have a direct impact on the conclusions. 

Random assignment of treatments is used to control the validity of the study.  In experimental 

studies (true vs.  quasi-), the researcher attempts to tightly control the internal validity to the 

17

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

extent that he/she attempts to tightly control the circumstances of an experiment, thus limiting 

the conditions  to which he/she can generalize the study’s findings (Gall et al.,1996; Meyers & 

Fienberg, 1992; The Qualitative Versus Quantitative Debate, 2003).      

In 1990, the U.S. Department of Education commissioned the Governing Board of the 

National Research Council to conduct a thorough investigative review of two major evaluation 

studies of bilingual education.  The project assignment was to review and assess the 

methodologies of data collection and analysis of the study entitled, The National Longitudinal 

Study of the Evaluation of the Effectiveness of Services for Language Minority Limited-English 

Proficient Students (nicknamed "The Longitudinal Study").  In 1983, researchers were asked to 

study the effectiveness of instruction for LEP students and compare the effectiveness of three 

different instructional strategies in bilingual education.  The three programs evaluated under the 

study were immersion, early exit, and late exit programs (Cummins & Genzuk, 1991; Meyer & 

Feinberg, 1992; Ramirez et al., 1991).  

The study revealed that LEP students’ services were not evenly distributed geographically 

across states and districts.  LEP students tended to be classified as “at-risk” and were from lower 

social economical backgrounds than monolingual students were.  The results indicated that LEP 

students performed below grade level as early as the first grade, yet in Mathematics, their skills 

were superior.  Most of the instruction was conducted in English or in a combination of the LEP 

student’s primary language (L1) and English.  Program entrance and exit procedures were 

inconsistent among various school districts within the same state; there were relatively no time 

limits on the amount of time a student could participate in bilingual programs.  Lack of qualified 

instructional staff was a critical problem as well (Cummins & Genzuk, 1991; Meyer & Feinberg, 

18

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

1992; Ramirez et al., 1991).  The most significant result from this study supporting SEI was that 

when a LEP student is ready to learn in English and instruction is provided in English language 

arts, he/she showed greater achievement.  The results of the study also affirmed that LEP 

students receiving ESL services exited their programs at a faster rate than those in primary 

language programs (Cummins & Genzuk, 1991; Meyer & Feinberg, 1992; Ramirez et al., 1991). 

The second study was entitled the Longitudinal Study of Structured English Immersion 

Strategy, Early Exit, Late-Exit and Transitional Bilingual Programs (nicknamed The Immersion 

Study) and Ramirez, Ramey, and Yuen (1991) conducted it.  The study compared the 

effectiveness of two alternative programs- Structured English Immersion and late-exit 

Transitional Bilingual Education programs.  The programs’ ultimate goal was to teach LEP 

students English.  The panel reviewing this study suggested that the Immersion Study contained 

many biases.  The comparison groups were not from the same social economical groups, 

numerous parents received AFDC, and a marginal number received some form of preschool 

education.  The results of the study determined that the programs and students studied were not 

comparable (Meyer & Feinberg, 1992; Porter, 2000; Ramirez et al., 1991).  

One of the negative attributes addressed in this study was the high attrition rate of LEP 

students.  The high attrition rate is not new in the educational realm.  This is a critical area that 

needs to be addressed and is a major challenge to consider when conducting any type of study in 

bilingual education.  A percentage of LEP students left the study once they were reclassified as 

Fluent English Proficient or FEP; however, some students left not being fully proficient and 

others transferred to other classes, schools, states, or even countries.  Nearly one-half of the 

students left the study; therefore, the attrition rate was relatively high (Ramirez et al., 1991).  No 

19

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

further research was conducted to monitor the achievement of those LEP students who left the 

programs (Meyer & Feinberg, 1992).  Experimental design can be very rigorous and does show 

promise for use by the Kenosha Unified School District to assess its Language Assistance 

Programs utilized now and those of the future.  Any proposed research study must be feasible, 

affordable, and ethical.      

Surveys

Surveys are one of the most frequently used methods of gathering data for research in 

education.  When used appropriately, surveys have many advantages.  Surveys can play a 

significant part in an organization’s comprehensive needs assessment by identifying areas for 

improvement and issues that need to be explored.  Surveys can be complex, time consuming and 

expensive; yet, they allow one to gather critical data rapidly (Witkin & Altschuld; 1995). 

Schools utilize surveys because they are relatively easy to administer; they can easily be 

disseminated in a variety of settings, and they offer additional opportunities for gathering 

relevant data.  Surveys can be distributed in the classroom or sent home with students; they can 

be returned in the same manner.  Often, administrators will disseminate surveys to teachers, 

parents, and students as an alternative method of gathering information about the strengths and 

weaknesses of the school and/or a specific program (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Meyers & 

Feinberg, 1992; Gall et al., 1996).  

“When the purpose of a study is to provide a systematic description of a large number of 

programs, institutions, or an individual, a case-study approach will simply not do… one way to 

20

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

reach the generalization is through sample surveys” (Meyers & Feinberg, 1992, p. 22).  Surveys 

are a form of observational study in that they capture a collection of many cases (Witkin & 

Altschuld, 1995).  “Observational studies are most naturally suited to drawing descriptive 

conclusions or statements about how groups differ” (Meyers & Feinberg, 1992, p. 25).  In 

observational studies, the researcher does not attempt to control the treatments but rather 

observes the treatments in a natural setting, and this can be true of surveys.  Surveys are analyzed 

in a quantitative manner.  

When constructing a survey, researchers must carefully plan some critical aspects of the 

design before it can be considered valid.  Researchers must consider the following: target 

population, sampling, and method of distribution, questionnaire design, item content, item 

format, scales, and data analysis (Meyers & Feinberg, 1992).  Based on the consensus of the data 

collected from the survey, the researcher is able to identify themes, trends or patterns and set 

his/her research agenda as needed.  Feedback is measured through computation of the central 

tendency of these themes or patterns (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Fienberg & Meyers, 1992; Gall 

et al., 1996).  

One major drawback of implementing surveys as a mechanism for gathering data is that 

they have become so commonplace.  Often people will discard them without responding which 

leads to a high attrition rate (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Gall et al., 1996; Meyers & Feinberg, 

1992).  Because of the high cost of conducting surveys, Kenosha Unified School District began 

using enGauge, a web-based survey program, as a more effective way to survey its community 

(staff, parents, and students).  EnGauge (2000) was designed to help school districts plan and 

evaluate their systemwide use of educational technology.  Kenosha Unified hired enGauge to 

21

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

survey its community to determine if its technology integration is currently functioning well 

within the District.  Data gathered will help the District to formulate its technology goals in order 

to improve student learning (Kenosha Unified School District, 2003).

An example of a research study in which a survey was utilized as a viable method of 

gathering information about the strengths and weaknesses of a specific program was illustrated 

by a study conducted in Massachusetts (2000).  The survey was used to study the participation in 

and performance of Massachusetts’ LEP student population on the Massachusetts 

Comprehensive Assessment System (MCAS).  This study was the first reliable study to be 

conducted or published on LEP achievement in Massachusetts.  In 1999, Massachusetts 

mandated that all students educated in the United States for three years or more participate in the 

MCAS assessment.  This pioneer study compared LEP students’ achievement by district; it also 

reported on LEP participation and achievement (Beals, Peladino & Porter, 2000).  

The results of the survey concluded that the data collected by the Massachusetts 

Department of Education were flawed, and the results were very difficult to interpret.  The data 

reported were said to be contradictory and inconsistent with the number of LEP students tested, 

and further investigation was required in order to determine the accurate results.  LEP students 

who were in the United States less than three years were allowed to take their assessments in the 

Spanish/English version in Mathematics and Science.  Eligible LEP students did not participate 

in the math and science portion of the assessments in more than half of the districts surveyed; in 

other cases, no scores were recorded.  The assessment forms were not even properly marked to 

identify whether or not these students tested in English and/or in Spanish (Beals et al., 2000).  

22

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

The results also indicated that Massachusetts’ schools must, in the future, analyze the 

LEP student population in the area of participation and performance.  The Massachusetts 

Department of Education survey concluded that the department must do a better job at tracking 

the progress of those school districts that have high academic performances and test 

participation.  The results also indicated a need to further conduct qualitative studies of 

classrooms and observe those schools that have a higher participation in order to identify 

effective instructional strategies.  In this case, qualitative assessment preceded the quantitative 

assessment (Beals et al., 2000).  Surveys will continue to play an important role in educational 

research.  KUSD is expected to continue to use the software program enGauge to assess the 

effectiveness of its educational programs.     

The Crawford-slip Method

The Crawford-slip method is much like the nominal group technique (NGT) utilized in 

education.  It is a method utilized in strategic planning and is an effective way to establish 

consensus on a specific topic or agenda from a group or committee desiring a way to gather 

information on the future of educational institutions, educational programs, or policies 

(Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Koalaty Kid, 2002).  Educational institutions employ this type of 

strategic planning in order to cope with a rapidly changing system.  Due to the nature of changes 

in bilingual education, the Crawford-slip method is a valid method of obtaining information.  

This type of data collection is a group technique in that it is a highly structured method of 

collecting data from a group or committee when the group has reached a consensus.  The use of 

23

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

groups to gather critical information is the most widely used method for gathering facts, opinions 

and data needed for meeting an organization’s agenda.  Groups are ideally comprised of six to 

ten people such as key members of organizations, experts, members of the community and/or 

parents.  The purpose of these groups is to produce and prioritize a vast number of ideas 

generated by the topic, allowing the researcher(s) to identify easily recurring trends.  It can also 

be used to brainstorm research ideas or as a tool in conducting a thorough needs assessment 

(Altschuld & Witkin, 1995).  

Utilizing the Crawford-slip method as a type of brainstorming process entails a group of 

committee members responding to a question posed by the researcher(s).  The questions are 

usually determined by carefully examining internal and external features of the educational 

organization.  Rather than stating the groups’ ideas, members of a selected committee record 

their thoughts on slips of paper or sticky notes.  The slip of paper has neither a number nor a rank 

recorded on it, and each idea is recorded on a separate piece of paper to facilitate analysis.  The 

final product reveals a common set of themes and/or patterns to further to be investigated 

(Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Koalaty Kid, 2002).     

The Kenosha Unified School District created a Five-Year Long Range Committee for its 

Language Assistance Programs to explore the educational services offered to its LEP students. 

Using the Crawford-Slip method, the committee brainstormed ideas on how the District can 

begin to comply with the Office of Civil Rights (OCR) Compliance Action Plan, and how to 

meet future needs of the District’s growing LEP student population.  These processes led the 

team members to explore further other research methods such as Cross-impact analysis and 

scenario development in order to strategically plan for the future trends.     

24

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Cross –Impact Analysis

Cross-impact analysis attempts to reveal the conditional probability of an event, given 

that various events have or have not occurred (Hackett, Morrison, & Teddlie, 1982).  This 

method allows researchers to build an understanding of the vast amounts of information gathered 

and helps them analyze the trends and/or patterns that determine how they affect one another. 

Using cross-impact analysis allows researchers to incorporate various trends or variables, both 

qualitative, and quantitative in the analysis.  This type of research relies on few assumptions and 

is relatively easy to comprehend (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Cross Impact Matrix, 

http:www.iit.edu; Hackett et al., 1982).  

Cross-impact analysis may be conducted in four steps.  First, the committee uses 

brainstorming techniques to identify approximately twenty key concepts or themes that may 

affect the future of an organization.  Then the committee or facilitator places these trends or 

themes in a matrix that is predetermined.  Third, the matrix is then compared by each row entry 

and column entry.  Finally, the matrix is analyzed to determine new trends.  When analyzing the 

data, the committee and researchers investigate patterns or events that may affect areas positively 

or negatively.  This process should be conducted several times in order to assure its validity 

(Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Cross Impact Matrix, http:www.iit.edu; Hackett et al., 1982). 

Developing trends that will have a high probability of affecting the original concerns are singled 

out.  A cross-impact analysis may reveal future trends or themes.  The limitation of using a cross-

25

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

impact analysis is that it may produce isolated themes or trends (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; 

Cross Impact Matrix, 2002; Hackett et al., 1982).  

In a study called Developing Public Education Policy through Policy Impact Analysis 

(1982) the authors, Hackett, Morrison & Teddlie, attempted to illustrate how cross-impact 

analyses can be developed to create or change policies to attain outcomes for the future of 

education in Louisiana.  This research was conducted with a four-step process: monitoring, 

forecasting, goal setting and cross-impact (policy analysis) implementation.  The created policies 

were ranked to determine their impact.  Those trends that were ranked as priorities were 

implemented and evaluated.  The process was repeated to further refine policies.  

In the monitoring stage, the variables were determined and a database was created.  In the 

forecasting stage, exploratory techniques were used to analyze trends and themes.  Qualitative 

and quantitative techniques were used to gather information necessary during this stage.  The 

qualitative and quantitative data gathered were obtained

 

  from school enrollment forms and were 

used to project enrollment trends.  In the goal-setting stage, exploratory forecasting was 

converted into desirable futures, which lead to the construction of new schools and 

implementation of new programs.  Matrices were created in the policy analysis and 

implementation stage, thus allowing the local school boards to evaluate, implement new policies, 

and/or change old policies (Hackett et al., 1982).

Scenario Planning

26

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Scenario planning is both a qualitative and a quantitative approach that empowers 

participants to break traditional barriers and stereotypes often found in research and creates an 

organization’s vision in the future.  Scenario planning originated nearly thirty years ago from 

Royal Dutch Shell, a company that experienced tremendous success in foreseeing the Arab oil 

embargo (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Katz, Genesee, Gottlieb, & Malone, 2001).  Scenario 

planning creates a vision that expresses a multifaceted perspective of complex events and 

facilitates ongoing learning and strategic conversation, which supports effective growth and 

change.  “A good scenario planning project expands leaders; peripheral vision and forces them to 

challenge their own assumptions” (College of Marian, 2002, p. 1).  This methodology can be an 

intellectually challenging exercise that promotes dialogue among colleagues who want to 

collaborate to create a vision, an analysis, and/ or a plan of action that allows them to work more 

effectively together (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Katz et al., 2001).  

Scenario planning provides an opportunity for futuristic planning in and predicting 

precisely how the future will play out.  An excellent decision or strategy is one that plays out 

well across several possible scenarios.  These scenarios identify trends, which have an infinite 

number of possibilities, or situations that may lead to attaining better decisions and/or outcomes. 

“The careful analysis of a particular scenario often allows for a rich contextual picture of 

surrounding of some activity or event of interest” (Meyers & Feinberg, 1992, p. 21).  Once these 

trends have been identified, quantitative data are analyzed to address various situations 

portrayed, including social, economic, political and technological issues (Altschuld & Witkin, 

1995; Katz et al., 2001).  

27

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Every field has its own pattern for these types of studies, and bilingual education is no 

exception.  Because the future of education is unpredictable, scenario planning provides an 

alternative method to reach a qualitative research goal by providing a common vocabulary and 

effective ways for communicating complex ideas and/or concepts.  In education, it is utilized as a 

way to define a vision statement, an instrument for instruction, and/or an assessment (Altschuld 

& Witkin, 1995; Borjesson, 2002; College of Marin, 2002; Katz et al., 1997; Smith, 1996; 

Wilkinson, 1998).  

Kenosha Unified School District (2003) created its vision statement for its LAPs by 

incorporating the Crawford-slip method and cross-impact analysis; this process led to scenario 

planning.  Themes or patterns that emerged from these sessions allowed the committee to 

formulate a five-year action plan, and enabled the District to plan more effectively and adapt 

more readily to what was actually happening within the District’s LAPs.  The five-year plan 

enabled the District to investigate areas needing improvement.  The committee wanted to 

anticipate what could happen in the future; as a result, it created proposals through scenarios to 

test their resiliency.  Members voted on the ranking of the scenarios and brainstormed tactics to 

improve the programs.  The committee suggested developing new programs to better serve its 

LEP students as well as explore viable alternative program options (KUSD Five-Year Long 

Range Committee, 2003).     

The Delphi Technique and/or Survey

28

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

The Delphi technique and/or survey are common data collection tools suitable for 

gathering pertinent data for a variety of dimensions in educational research.  The Delphi 

technique was developed in the 1950s by researchers from The Rand Corporation.  “The Delphi 

operates on the principle that several heads are better than one" (Ludwig, 1997, p. 1).  The 

Delphi technique and survey utilize a methodology that combines qualitative and quantitative 

data to explore futuristic designs in order to make appropriate and reasonable changes within an 

organization.  The Delphi technique and survey are two different approaches to data collection.

In the 1980s, the Delphi technique continued to grow and was implemented in most 

educational realms, particularly in the area of defining curriculum and instruction.  The Delphi 

technique is used repeatedly to seek answers to pertinent educational issues.  The Delphi 

technique is implemented within a group setting and the goal is to reach group consensus.  The 

researchers must determine the purpose of the Delphi Technique.  They then identify the 

participants or panel, which is typically comprised of fifteen to twenty participants but usually no 

more than fifty.  Then the researcher proceeds to contact participants.  In this Delphi group 

process, people provide written responses to questionnaires.  Using the Delphi technique in 

group settings requires many modifications and also requires the researcher to score and process 

the results rapidly.  It is not used as often as the mailed Delphi survey (Altschuld & Witkin, 

1995; American Policy Organization, 2003; Ludwig, 1997; Rosenbaum, 1991).  

 The Delphi survey is a prediction tool that uses an iterative survey process over a 

specific time frame (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; American Policy Organization, 2003; Ludwig, 

1997).  Like other data collection techniques, the Delphi survey has three steps: planning, 

carrying out the survey, and following up with the data collected.  In the planning stage of the 

29

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

survey, the committee must repeatedly review and rate items; this is a unique feature of the 

Delphi process, which makes it a complex design to implement.  The survey is developed, 

mailed, and the data are collected.  After the data are collected, the researcher analyzes the data 

or creates another survey based on the responses of the first survey; then a second survey is 

mailed to participants.  This cyclical process is repeated to determine the need for further data 

collection.  Based on the consensus of the data collected from the survey, the researcher is able to 

identify themes, trends or patterns and set his/her research agenda as needed.  Feedback is 

measured through computation of the central tendency of these themes or patterns.  In the 

educational setting, a Delphi survey would be easy to administer (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; 

American Policy Organization, 2003; Ludwig, 1997; Rosenbbaum, 1991).  The Kenosha Unified 

School District’s KUSD Five-Year Long Range Committee (2003) is currently using the Delphi 

survey process to request pertinent data from staff members to evaluate and improve its language 

assistance programs.  

Morphological Analysis

Morphological analysis is often used in conjunction with a relevance tree, which is an 

analytic technique that allows one to subdivide trends into smaller topics.  In education, it is used 

to identify new program opportunities and involves the mapping of overall solutions and 

constructing scenarios.  This method is a systematic approach to seek structure out of current and 

future states of a particular organization, creating new alternatives to bridge the gaps that are 

present in the programs.  By mapping the researcher’s perspective and future possibilities, a 

30

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

formulation of the problem is created.  The researcher defines and examines all the 

characteristics of the problem.  He/she proceeds to construct a multidimensional matrix that 

combines patterns to illustrate the possible solutions.  Based on the information gathered, an 

evaluation of all possible outcomes is conducted and the researcher conducts an in-depth analysis 

of the best possible solutions.  The primary purpose of the morphological analysis is to organize 

relevant information in an orderly way (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995; Gordon, & Raffensperger, 

1973; Mind Tools, 2002).

Morphological analysis is also an identification process used in Applied Linguistics, in 

which the researcher seeks to derive meaning of a word-stem from a full word; this is referred to 

as the identification of syntactic of a stem of a word.  To effectively utilize this form of analysis, 

the researcher must be able to manipulate spelling rules for affixes.  In the past fifteen years, 

applied linguists have made further advances in the area of morphological analysis by bridging 

the gap between real-life applications in natural language and processing through technology. 

Because this is not a historical comparison analysis comparing various languages, there will be 

no further inquiries into these types of methodologies (Gazdar, 1989).

31

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Trend Exploration

Trend exploration is a method of determining alternative futuristic outcomes by graphing 

extended data in relation to their influences on one another; it is often utilized in strategic 

planning in conjunction with cross-impact analyses and scenario planning.  The data gathered are 

derived from existing historical documents readily available in which the researcher analyzes and 

investigates historical trends or themes.  He/she then proceeds to compare the historical data to 

the organization’s concerns in order to interpret the information and draw conclusions.  “In 

education, there is a strong movement to use educational indicators and to link them in a way 

that they show the complexity of schooling so that they can be used to form policy making” 

(Altschuld & Witkin, 1995, p. 232).  Trends are plotted and placed in a matrix where 

assumptions can be illustrated to show underlying trends.  If trends are evident, the researcher 

then must evaluate the data to determine if there are enough historical data that may define this 

trend.  The researcher proceeds to plot the trend; this action is carried out with descriptive 

statistics (Altschuld & Witkin, 1995).  

 

Conclusion

Regardless of one’s opinion regarding bilingual education, clearly more research is 

needed in this field. “Real studies are needed on the effectiveness of English language 

instruction” (Porter, 1997, p.31).  Linguistic experts contend that it is now time to begin to put 

32

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

aside difference amongst LAPs (Amrein & Pena, 2000).  Schools are continuously failing to 

meet various LEP students’ academic needs.  The previously discussed research methodologies 

(qualitative and quantitative) provide school districts with sufficient ways to collect data in order 

to determine the effectiveness of their language assistance programs.  Districts are required to 

take “appropriate action” to ensure their LEP students have equal access to the curriculum.  The 

programs must be based on “sound educational theory” and be adequately staffed.  School 

districts are mandated to evaluate their programs and to ensure that they are meeting the needs of 

LEP students, while complying with federal mandates.  However, the guidelines are minimal and 

vague; districts are granted the freedom to adopt any evaluation approach.  

Action research and case studies provide school districts and researchers a way to reflect 

upon what is working within the schools and use data to implement changes that have been 

proven effective in meeting the needs of LEP students. It can be a starting place to help 

predetermine what changes need to take place immediately.  School districts can use action 

research and case studies as a way to examine effective teaching strategies and/or innovations in 

bilingual education.  Educators and researchers recognize the need to have an in-depth 

understanding of the policies, programs, and practices that lead to successful innovations in 

bilingual education.  Further, they desire a greater understanding of how these innovations in 

programs, policies, and practices are implemented in different school districts.  Approaches to 

reforming bilingual education in one school district may be very helpful to educators elsewhere 

(Burnaford et al., 2001).     

School districts and researchers must begin to conduct quantitative comparative 

longitudinal studies within their schools.  They need to conduct these studies by comparing the 

33

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

language programs offered to its LEP students and evaluate the programs’ effectiveness. 

Because the available research tends to compare school districts against school districts, and 

programs against programs, it is often irrelevant due to the mere fact that each school district has 

its own unique circumstances.  One program is not the answer because every state and school 

district has its own set of standards and benchmarks.  

Language programs need to be analyzed on a case-by-case basis as their 
success is largely affected by the context in which the language program is 
developed.  Further, researchers indicate that micro-level and macro-level 
issues related to planning and implementation must be examined to 
understand how the sociopolitical context of schools may favor or 
impede…language programs’ success….  (Amrein & Pena, 2000 p. 2)

The National Research Council concluded after reviewing programs of the past 25 years, “There 

is little evidence to support which program is best.  The key issues are not finding a program that 

works for ALL children and localities, but finding a set program that works for the community of 

interest” (Crawford, 1997, pp. 27-28).  A one-size-fits-all curriculum does not take into account 

the variations of the LEP student population within a community; stipulating set conditions on 

what programs to teach and what to implement disregards the individual needs of LEP students 

such as age, maturity, language skills, previous home-country schooling, learning styles, and 

other issues unique to LEP students.  Through observational studies and quantitative analysis, 

school districts can monitor their LEP students who have left the program, those who have been 

re-designated as fluent English proficient, and those students who are refused services.  This 

information may lead to a better understanding of the education life of LEP students after they 

are mainstreamed into general education classes (Legge, 1998).  

34

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Today, researchers are in agreement that the decision to implement which of type of 

bilingual programs should be left up to the community, the parents of the LEP students, the 

school districts, and the states to decide.  Districts can use surveys, the Crawford-slip method, 

cross-impact analysis, scenario planning, Delphi technique and/or survey, morphological 

analysis, and trend exploration as methods of identifying their district’s language assistance 

programs’ needs and to determine their programs’ individual strengths and weaknesses.  These 

processes will allow the educational community to share practices and to seek ways to improve 

LEP students’ opportunities.  

The trends developed from these qualitative and quantitative techniques allow the 

researcher to emphasize what needs to be changed, while building on the experiences, insights, 

and sound educational practices.  By incorporating these research techniques, the researcher is 

able to reflect upon the immediate needs of the community.  Despite the outside educational 

sources that may be plaguing our schools, every school district, school, administrator, teacher, 

student, and parent must be held accountable for their LEP students’ progress.  Districts who do 

not evaluate their LAP’s are in direct violation of limited English proficient students’ civil rights 

(Crawford, 1997, pps.

 

27-28).  Not only is it the ethical thing to do, but it is also illegal not to 

evaluate the programs and make appropriate changes.  Only through evaluations can appropriate 

changes can be instituted; this process will lead to a better education for all LEP students. 

35

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

References

Akkari, A. (1998, Fall). Bilingual education: beyond linguistic instrumentalization.  Bilingual 

Research Journal, 22(2-4).  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 
http://brj.asu.edu/v22234/articles/ar2.html.

American Policy Organization. The "Delphi technique" and how it robs parents of control over 

their child's education. American Policy Center.  Retrieved October 19, 2003, from 
http://www.americanpolicy.org/educ/thedelphi.htm.

Amrein, A. & Pena, R. (2000). Asymmetry in dual language practice: Assessing imbalance in a 

program promoting equality.  Retrieved April 4, 2003 from 
http://epaa.asu.edu/epaa/v8n8.html. 

Amselle, J. & Chavez, L. (1997, February).  Bilingual education theory: Its effectiveness and 

parental opinions.  NASSP Bulletin.  81(586).

Beals, R., & Pedalino Porter, R.  (2000, August).  Bilingual students and the MCAS: Some bright 

spots in the gloom.  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 
http://www.ceousa.org/html/mcas.html.

Burnaford, G., Fischer, J., & Hobson, D. (2001). Teachers doing research.  A power of action 

through inquiry.  London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Capella University (2002, July).  Summer sessions handouts.  July Colloquia Presentations

Available on CD.

Center for Equal Opportunity.  (1996, August). The importance of learning English: A national 

opinion survey of Hispanic parents.

College of Marin.  Scenario planning.  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 

http://marin.cc.ca.us/scenario/what_is.htm.

Crawford, J. (1997).  Best evidence: Research foundations of Bilingual Education Act

Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 

http://www.ncborgwu.edu

 

 

.

  

Crawford, J. (1998, Winter).  Rethinking schools-does bilingual education work? 13(2). 

Retrieved October 25, 2002, from http://www.rethinkingschools.org/Archieves/13-
02/biside.htm.

Creating the future: What is scenario planning? Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 

http://edie.cprost.sfu.ca/~idea/scenarios.html.

36

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Cross impact matrix method of forecasting: Definition and historical background. (2002). 

Retrieved October 25, 2003, from http://iit.edu/~it/cross.html.

Cummins, J., & Genzuk, M.  (1991, March).  Analysis of final report longitudinal study of 

structured English immersion strategy, early exit, and late-exit transitional bilingual 
education programs for language-minority children.  The California Association for 
Bilingual Education Newsletter.

Cummins, J. (1999, February 22).  Research, ethics, and public discourse: The debate on 

bilingual education.  Paper presented at the National Conference of the American 
Association of Higher Education.

Cummins, J. Educational research in bilingual education.  Educational research thoughts

Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 
http://http:audiotap.addr.com/cummins/educatioanlresearch.html.

Department of Education, Office of Civil Rights (1999).  Retrieved October 22, 2002 from 

http://www.ed.gov/offices/OCR/ELL/index.html.

Development & Dissemination Schools Initiative.  Identifying effective practices for English 

language learners (ELLs) in D&D schools.  Effective practices for ELLs.  Retrieved 
October 23, 2002, from http://http:www.alliance.brown.edu/dnd/ep-for_ells.shtml.

enGauge (2000).  Retrieved on April 4, 2003, from 

engaugewww@contact.ncrel.org

 

 

.

  

Freeman, R.D.  (1996). Dual-language planning at Oyster Bilingual School: It’s much more than 

language.  TESOL Quarterly, 30 (3), 557-582.

The Futures Group.  (1994).  Relevance tree and morphological analysis.  AC/UNU Millennium 

project.  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from http://www.futurovenezuela.org/_curso/12-
tree.pdf.

Garcia, A., & Morgan, C. (2002).  A 50 state survey of requirements for the education of 

language minority children

Garcia, D. (2002).  Family English literacy program.  Department of foundations and 

professional studies, Florida International University.  Retrieved November 2, 2002, from 
http://www.cgcs.org/promise/whatworks/parental/part07.html. 

Gall, M. D., Borg, W. R. & Gall, J. P.  (1996).  Educational research.  An introduction.  (6

th

 ed.). 

White Plains, NY: Longman.

GBN's Scenario Tools.  GBN publications on the web.  Retrieved October 24, 2002, from 

http://www.gbn.org/public/gbnstory/scenarios/.

37

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Gersten, R., Taylor, R., Woodward, J., & Wite, W. (1997, Summer).  Structured English 

immersion for Hispanic students in the U.S.: Findings from the fourteen-year evaluation 
of the Uvalde Texas program.  
Retrieved October 10, 2002, from 
http://www.adihome.org/esp/v16n3/struct_imm_tex.pdf.

Gonzalez, G., & Maez, L.  F. (1995, Fall).  Advances in research in bilingual education. 

Directions in language & education, 1(5).  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 
http://www.ncela.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/directions/05.htm.

Hackett, R., Morrison, J.  L., & Teddlie, C.  E.  (1982).  Developing public education policy 

through policy impact analysis: The role of the educational planner.  Retrieved October 
24, 2002, from http://horizon.unc.edu/bios/morrison/papers/2.html.

Hardin, V.  (2001, Fall).  Transfer and variation in cognitive reading strategies of Latino fourth-

grade students in a Late-Exit bilingual program.  Bilingual research journal, 25(4). 
Retrieved September 25, 2002, from http://brj.asu/edu/v254/articles/art7.html.

Hotwired.  How to build scenarios: Planning for "long fuse, big bang" problems in an era of 

uncertainty.  Retrieved October 24, 2002, from 
http://http:www.wired.com/wired/scenarios/build.html.

Hakuta, K.  Improving education for all children: meeting the needs of language minority 

children.  Retrieved August 6, 2002, from http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Aspen.html.

Hakuta, K.  (2002, August 22).  Points on SAT-9 performance and Proposition 227.  Retrieved 

September 8, 2002, from http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Hakuta, K.  (2002, August 29).  What can we learn about the impact of Proposition 227 from 

SAT-9 scores.  Retrieved September 8, 2002, from http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Hakuta, K.  (2001, April 13).  The Education of language minority students.  Paper presented at 

United States Commission on Civil Rights.  Retrieved September, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Docs/CivilRightsCommision.htm

Hancock, Charles R.  Alternative assessment and second language study: What and why? Eric 

Digest.  Retrieved October 23, 2002, from http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/.

Hill, Kimberly (2000).  Beyond the numbers: A case study of the 1990 census promotion 

program and the implications for census 2000.  Retrieved April 2, 2003, from 
http://www.asu.edu/cronkite/thesis/kimhill/index.html.

Johnston, R. C.  & Viadero, D. (2002, March, 15).  Unmet promise: Raising minority 

achievement.  Education Week, 19 (27), 1-19.

 

 

38

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Katz, A., Genesee, F., Gottlieb, M., & Malone, M.  (2001). Scenarios for ESL standards-based 

assessment.  Alexandria: Teachers of English to Speakers of Other Languages.

Kerlin, B.  (1999). Qualitative research.  Analysis without numbers.  Retrieved April 2, 2003 

from 

http://kerlins.net/bobbi/research/myresearch/chifoo/

 

 

.

  

Kerper Mora, Jill.  (2002).  Sheltered Immersion contrast and controversy.  Retrieved July 30, 

2002, from http://coe.sdsu.edu/people/jmora/Pages/SEIvCanadian.htm.

Knezevik, B.  (2003). Teacher as classroom action researcher.  TESOL Program Presentations. 

TESOL 37- Annual Convention and Exhibit.  Baltimore, MD.  

Koalaty Kid.  Nominal group technique.  Retrieved October 24, 2002, from 

http://homepage.risd41.org/koalatykid/stories/story. 

Krashen, S.  (1999).  Structured immersion falls short of expectations: An analysis of Clark 

[Special issue].  NABE.

Krashen, S.  (1985). Insights and inquires.  Hayward: Alemany Press.

Krashen, S.  Why bilingual education? Eric Digest.  Retrieved October 23, 2002, from 

http://gophewracl.org/eric/digests/edorc968.html.

Kenosha Unified School District, (2003).  En gauge survey.  Phase II.  Retrieved on April 3, 

2003, from 

http://www.kusd.edu/

 

 

.

  

KUSD Five-Year Long Range Committee (2003).  Kenosha Unified School District No. 1, 

Kenosha, WI.     

Legge, C.  (2000, June).  Federal Court Decision.  In Decision by Judge Charles Legge: 

Refusing to delay the effective date of Proposition 227 by U.S.  District Judge Charles A. 
Legge.  
San Francisco: Federal Court Decision.  Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID-7776.

Littlejohn, J.  (1998, November).  Federal control out of control" The Office for Civil Rights' 

hidden policies on bilingual education.  Retrieved October 12, 2002, from 
http://www.ceousa.org/READ/ocr3.html.

Ludwig, B.  (1997).  Predicting the future: Have you considered using the Delphi methodology? 

Journal of Extension, 35(5).  Retrieved October 24, 2002, from 
http://http:www.joe/1997october/tt2.html.

39

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

MALDEF.  (1997, September).  Preliminary section-by-section of analysis of Unz Initiative.  In 

MALDEF.  Retrieved September 6, 2002, from One Nation: 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=5112.

MALDEF.  (1997, November).  MALDEF Questions and answers on the Unz Initiative.  In 

MALDEF.  Retrieved September 6, 2003, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=511155

Marcos, K., & Rennie, J.  (2001). The effectiveness of bilingual education.  ERIC/CLL Resource 

Guides Online.  Retrieved October 19, 2003, from 
http://www.cal.org/ericcll/faqs/rgos/bi.html.

Maxwell-Jolly, J., & Gandara, P.  Report review.  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 

http://bjr.asu.edu/archives/23v21/articles/gandara.html.

Meloy, Judith M.  (2002). Writing the qualitative dissertation.  Understanding by doing. 

London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Meyer, M.  M., & Feinberg, S.  E.  (1992).  The case for bilingual education strategies. 

Retrieved October, 2003, from 
http://www.ulib.org/webRoot/Books/National_Academy_Press_Books/bilingual_educati
on/bilingual.htm.

MindTools.  Attribute listing, morphological analysis & matrix analysis-Tools for creating new 

products & services.  In MindTools Bookstore.  Retrieved October 27, 2002, from 
http://www.mindtools.com/pages/articles/newCT_03.htm.

Morphological Analysis.  What is morphological analysis? Morphological Analysis.  Retrieved 

October 27, 2002, from http://comp.leeds.ac.uk/nti-kbs/ai5/Misc/morphemes.html.

Morphological analysis.  Sub-Sentential Processing.  Retrieved October 27, 2002, from 

http://cslu.cse.ogi.edu/HLTsurvey/ch3node4.html.

No Child Left Behind Act of 2001 Title I sec. 1111(b)(3)(C)(x).

Porter, R.  (1997, September-October).  The politics of bilingual education.  Pedalino Society.  

Porter, R.  (1998, May).  The case against bilingual education: Why even Latino parents are 

rejecting a program designed for their children's benefit.  READ Institute.  Retrieved 
October 18, 2002, from READ Institute: 
http://lmri.ucsb.edu/resdiss/2/researchreports.htm.

40

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Porter, R., & Rossell, C., & Tamayo, L.  (2002, June).  An initiative petition for a law: An act 

relative to the teaching of English in public schools.  English for the Children of 
Massachusetts.  
English for the Children of Massachusetts.  Retrieved September 6, 
2002, from http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4257.

The qualitative versus quantitative analysis (2003).  Retrieved April 5, 2003, from 

http://www.ling.lancs.ac.uk/monkey/ihe/linguistics/corpus3/3qual.htm

.

The qualitative versus quantitative debate ( 2003).  Retrieved March 20, 2003, from 

http://writing.colostate.edu/references/research/gentrans/pop2f.cfm.

Ramirez, J., Ramey, D.  R., & Yuen, S.  D. (1991).  Final report: Longitudinal study of 

structured English immersion strategy, early-exit and late-exit transitional bilingual 
education programs for language-minority children.  
[Executive Summary] Retrieved 
October 21, 2002, from http://www.ncela.gwu.edu/miscpubs/ramirez/.

Reese, D.  (1997, March).  The controversy over bilingual education.  Parent News.  Retrieved 

October 25, 2002, from http://npin.org/pnews/1997/pnew397/pnew397h.html.

Rieley, J.  (1997, March).  Understanding scenario planning in higher education.  In The Center 

for Continuous Quality Improvement: Milwaukee Area Technical College.  Retrieved 
October 25, 2002, from http:///www.boardrush/jbrieley/6d1.htm.

Rosenbaum J.  (1991, July).  The pedagogic Delphi.  The Pedagogic Delphi.  Retrieved October 

21, 2002, from http://ithaca.edu/johnrosenbaum/writing/dephi.htm.

Rossell, C.  H.  Mystery on the bilingual express: A critique of the Thomas and Collier study. 

The READ Institute.  Retrieved October 12, 2002, from 
http://lmri.ucsb.edu/resdiss/2/researchreports.htm.

Rossell, C.  H., Ph.D.  (2000, June).  Different questions, different answers: A critique of the 

Hakuta, Butler, and Witt report, "How long does it take English learners to attain 
proficiency?" The READ Institute.  Retrieved October 19, 2002, from 
http://lmri.ucsb.edu/resdiss/2/researchreports.htm.

Scenario Planning Resources.  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 

http://www.crt.se/~mb/scenario/Scenario-planning-resources-9htm.

Slavin, R.  E., & Madden, N.  Effects of success for all on the achievement of English language 

learners.  Retrieved October 25, 2002, from 
http://www.successforall.net/resource/research/englanlearn.htm.

41

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Thomas, W.  P., & Collier, V.  P. (2001).  A national study of school effectiveness for language 

minority students' long-term academic achievement.  Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 
CREDE: http://www.crede.ucsc.edu/research.

Tucker, G.  (1999, August).  A global perspective on bilingualism and bilingual education.  ERIC 

Digest.  Retrieved October 18, 2002, from 
http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/ed435168.html.

Veronesi, Peter.  (1997). A case study of alternative assessment: Student, teacher and observer 

perceptions in a ninth grade biology classroom.  Retrieved April 3, 2003, from 
http://www.ed.psu.edu/ci/Journals/97pap39.htm.

The Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction.  (2002). Legal responsibilities when serving 

limited-English -proficient (LEP) students in K-12 public schools.  Retrieved September 
5, 2002, from http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/dpi/dlsea/equity/biling.html.

The Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction (2002).  Best practices considerations when 

serving limited-English Proficient (LEP) students in K-12 public schools.  Retrieved 
September 5, 2002, from http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/dpi/dlsea/equity/biling.html

 

 .  

Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction.  Alternative assessment.  Retrieved September 5, 

2002, from http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/html.

Zikmund, W. G. (2000).  Business Research Method.  (6

th

 ed.).  New York City: Harcourt.     

42

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

QUESTION 2

Analyze how Newcomers programs are funded and supported (local, state and/or federal).  What 
theoretic constructs can be drawn from these funded programs in developing a Newcomer 
Center Program for the Kenosha Unified School District?

Currently the United States population is estimated to be 287 million people, and foreign-

born immigrants represent over 10 % of the entire population (Krashen, 2001; World Population 

Data Sheet, 2003).  Forty percent of new immigrants are children; one out of five children in the 

United States is either an immigrant or a child of immigrants (Viadero, 2000).

According to the American Civil Liberties Union, since the founding of 
the United States, more than 55 million immigrants from every continent 
have settled in the U.S.  Indeed, with the exception of Native Americans, 
everyone   in   the   nation   is   either   an   immigrant,   or   the   descendent   of 
voluntary or involuntary immigrants.   (Pathways, Immigrant Education, 
2002, p.1)

Within a decade, this student population has nearly doubled (Hakuta, 2001).  In the 

1990s, the number of children of immigrants exceeded 5 million, representing over 150 different 

languages (Friedlander, 1991).  The 5 most prominent language groups being serviced in U.S. 

public schools are: Spanish (72.9%), Vietnamese (3.9%), Hmong (1.8%), Cantonese (1.7%) and 

Cambodian (1.6%)  (ELLKBase, 2002).  Seventy-five percent of all immigrants and/or limited 

English proficient (LEP) students come from highly impoverished areas (Hakuta, 2001).   

Limited English Proficient (LEP) is the legal term used to identify students, who were not 

born in the United States, or students whose native language is not English, and those students 

who cannot participate effectively in regular classrooms because they lack fluency in spoken and 

written English(Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  LEP is the term recognized by the Office 

43

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

of Civil Rights (OCR), and the term used throughout this comprehensive paper to refer to such 

students (Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  Non English Proficient (NEP) is the legal term 

used to identify students who are recent arrivals (immigrant-status) and have been in the United 

States less than one year.  NEP students' native language is not English, and they cannot 

participate effectively in regular classrooms because they lack fluency in spoken and written 

English.  NEP is the term recognized by the Office of Civil Rights (OCR), and the term used 

throughout this comprehensive paper to refer to such students (Department of Education-OCR, 

1999).  Bilingual is a generalized term that refers to all programs other than English as a Second 

Language (ESL).  In this paper, the term bilingual includes all Language Assistance Programs 

(LAP) offered within the Kenosha Unified School District, and unless otherwise stated, it 

includes the following programs: Dual Immersion, Transitional Bilingual Education (TBE), 

English as a Second Language (ESL), and Sheltered English Immersion (SEI).  Although ESL 

and SEI are not commonly referred to as bilingual programs, they are the most commonly used 

methods of instruction for LEP students.  

“Over the past two decades, America’s classrooms have undergone an unmistakable 

metamorphosis” (Friedlander, 1991, p. 1).  There is seldom a school district, whether rural or 

urban, that has not been affected by this influx of newly arrived immigrant students (Crawford, 

1997; Hakuta, 2001; Krashen, 2001).  “More than 40% of LEP students in the United States are 

enrolled in rural schools” (Berube, 2002, p. 1).  Today, there are over 8.6 million children 

enrolled in U.S. schools, and nearly 40 % require English language assistance, including the 

following subgroups: 3.2 million students identified and/or classified as being LEP; 1.3 million 

LEP students enrolled in state and local bilingual programs nationwide; and 900,000 LEP 

44

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

students receiving language services funded by federal, state, and local bilingual education 

programs and/or through Title VII funding (Krashen, 2001).  Title VII helps to ensure that LEP 

students have an equal opportunity to learn challenging content and high-level skills that are 

expected of all students (Crawford, 1997).  However, there remain over 640,000 LEP students 

who are not being serviced through any type of language programs (Krashen, 2001).  

Large states, such as California, Florida, Texas, and New York, have historically absorbed 

the brunt of the immigration expansion.  Smaller states, such as North Carolina, are also 

experiencing tremendous growth (Berube, 2002).  The LEP population of California represents 

50% of all LEP students in the United States (Hakuta, 2001).  In 1980, the Los Angeles Unified 

School District (LAUSD) reported about 110,000 students with 87 different languages, costing 

the district $46 million to educate.  In two decades, that number increased to over 1.4 million 

LEP students and/or NEP students reported by LAUSD (Hakuta, 2001).  Recently, New York 

City public schools enrolled more than 176,000 LEP students, of whom 90% were recent 

immigrants (Brown, 2000).  In Princeton, New Jersey, 99 % of its newly arrived immigrant 

students are Hispanics and come from agricultural backgrounds.  In St. Louis, Missouri and Des 

Moines, Iowa, school officials are enrolling immigrant LEP students from countries as divergent 

as Vietnam, Iraq, Haiti, and Mexico.  Many school districts are enrolling students from Bosnia 

and Somalia who have never attended school before (Brown, 2000; Crawford, 1997; Duignan, 

2001; Hakuta, 1998, 2001; Legge, 2000; Midwest Equity Assistance Center, 1997). 

Hawaii’s public schools are experiencing an increase in the enrollment of 
students from Micronesia.  The latest data from the Hawaii Department of 
Education’s (HIDOE’s) English for Second Language Learners (ESLL) 
Program show that 13 % of the state’s total English as a Second Language 

45

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

(ESL)   student   population,   or   1,671   students,   come   from   the   Freely 
Associated   States   (FAS):   the   Federated   States   of   Micronesia   (FSM   – 
Chuuk, Kosrae, Pohnpei, and Yap), the Republic of the Marshall Islands 
(RMI), and the Republic of Palau (ROP).  They represent a region that is 
not  well known  but that is vastly diverse linguistically,  culturally,  and 
geographically.  (Heine, 2003, p. 1)
 

Wisconsin public schools have also experienced a drastic expansion of LEP students 

(Pabst, 2001).

  

As of 2001, Wisconsin public schools provided an education for over 27,000 LEP 

students in 170 school districts, with Spanish and Hmong speakers accounting for the largest 

number of new students (Wisconsin DPI, 2001).  Milwaukee Public Schools, the largest school 

district in the state, has had an increase of LEP students, while their monolingual student 

population decreased (Pabst, 2001).  In 2002-2003, Kenosha Unified School District, also known 

as "the District", the third largest school district in Wisconsin, enrolled over 21,000 students. 

The District’s LAPs consist of a Sheltered English Immersion (SEI) program (K-5), a pull-out 

English as a Second Language (ESL) program (6-12), Transitional Bilingual Education (TBE) 

program in K-12, and a Dual Immersion Program (Spanish/English) in K-5  (KUSD, 2003).  The 

District offered its LAP services to over 1,300 LEP students at all grade levels.  Enrollment data 

were retrieved from Wisconsin’s “Third Friday in September Enrollment Count.”  As of March 

2003, the District identified and assessed an additional 700+ LEP students due to the "No Child 

Left Behind Act of 2001.”  The District has continuously enrolled ten to fifteen new LEP 

students per month (KUSD, 2003).  

School districts, administrators, and teachers are facing a multitude of barriers when 

dealing with this influx of immigrant NEP students, when compared to past immigrants, and are 

struggling to meet their student population’s unique needs.  “Every individual and new group of 

46

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

immigrants bring with them their own sets of needs or priorities that must be taken into 

consideration in a case-by-case manner by school districts, administrators and teachers” 

(Friedlander, 1991, p. 3).  Today, most of the nearly 27 million new immigrants come from Latin 

America, Asia, the Caribbean, and the Middle East.  Additionally, most of the newcomers speak 

Spanish, but native speakers of many other languages, including Mandarin, Pilipino, Russian, 

Haitian Creole, Polish, Punjabi, Vietnamese, Hmong, and Hindi, are also prevalent.  In fact, over 

half of the language programs enroll students from four or more different native language 

backgrounds (Short, 1998).  

This new wave of immigrant students is generally having a more difficult time adjusting 

to regular school settings.  Today’s new immigrants are coming from a variety of educational 

realms.  Some come from well-educated families with great expertise and knowledge, while 

others come from areas where they received little to no educational support.  A large percent of 

these immigrants are from non-English speaking countries where access to formal education is 

limited.  Numerous newly arrived immigrant students are virtually illiterate and/or have received 

less than their age-appropriate education in their native language (Friedlander, 1991). 

Regardless of the conditions that brought them to this land, almost all 
newcomers have in some way been affected by the immigrant experience. 
Most   of   these   young   people   have   felt   alienation,   loneliness   or   an 
undermining of their sense of self-confidence in the face of a strange new 
world.  (Friedlander, 1991, p. 3)    

Many immigrants have never attended school in their home countries, and/or may have 

had limited schooling that may have been interrupted by traumatic events in their lives. 

Immigrants flee their countries for several reasons: religious/political conflicts, extreme poverty, 

47

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

and/or lack of opportunity.  Immigrant students may have experienced hardships that most 

American students have never experienced and may bring unforeseen emotional "baggage" to the 

classroom.  This knowledge requires that the students' new home schools, administrators, and 

teachers be equipped with additional resources to help their immigrant students overcome their 

often horrific past experiences (The Midwest Equity Assistance Center, 1997; Viadero, 2000). 

Meanwhile, other immigrant students may experience some difficulties in understanding the U.S. 

grading system(s), social customs, and other complexities of the American school system.  All 

new immigrants experience some degree of "culture shock."  Culture shock describes the anxiety 

a person feels when he/she moves to a different place; the term expresses the lack of direction, or 

feeling of not knowing “what” or “how” to do things in a new environment.  Newcomer students 

who experience culture shock may not know what is appropriate or inappropriate inside and 

outside the classroom (Guipana, 1998). 

Older NEP immigrant students at the middle and high school levels are experiencing 

greater difficulty adjusting to U.S. public schools in comparison to elementary students 

(Schwartz, 1996).  Newcomer students at the secondary level range in age from ten to twenty-

two years and come from many language backgrounds (Short, 1998).  They face greater 

challenges when learning a second language due to neurological developmental periods, which 

favor quick language acquisition by younger children (Schwartz, 1996).  The older students are 

expected to read and comprehend textbooks, and to learn complex subject matter that requires a 

more sophisticated use of the English language (termed "academic English").  Further, they are 

subjected to high stakes assessments, which can play a major role in determining graduation 

completion requirements (Schwartz, 1996; Short, 1998).  

48

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Seldom do older immigrants with deficient academic preparation ever successfully 

transition to fluent English proficiency; they most often remain several years below normal grade 

levels, and/or drop out (Johnston & Viadero, 2002; Schwartz, 1996).  “Achievement gaps are so 

pronounced that in 1996, several national tests found Hispanic 12th graders scoring at roughly 

the same levels in reading and math as white 8th graders” (Johnston & Viadero, 2002, pps. 18-

19).  This achievement gap will continue to widen as the LEP student population increases 

because school districts continue to provide less language support and resources for these older 

students (Schwartz, 1996).  Some older NEP and/or LEP students are placed in watered down, 

remedial classes, even if their education in their native language was superior.  This practice 

impedes academic growth and decreases NEP/LEP students’ chances to attend universities 

(Schwartz, 1996).  In KUSD’s Five-Year Long Range Committee’s Action Plan (2003), it listed 

the lack of additional language support at the middle and high school levels as a major concern 

for its LEP student population.  Currently, the District only has one ESL teacher who services its 

LEP students at each of the middle and high schools (KUSD, 2003).  

Consider the following fictitious scenarios that describe the experiences of typical older 

immigrant students entering U.S. public schools.  Jose is a 14-year-old immigrant Spanish 

speaker who has just arrived in New York City.  Jose left his native country of Angola during a 

time of war, where he witnessed the execution of his father, uncles, and two older brothers.  Jose 

has less than four years of formal education and lacks literacy skills in his native language. 

Jose’s mother enrolls him in his local neighborhood public school, and he is placed in 9th grade 

due to his age, not because of his academic abilities.  Jose’s school district does not offer a 

Newcomers program; therefore, he is then placed into an overcrowded mainstreamed classroom, 

49

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

and possibly serviced by an ESL or bilingual teacher once or twice a week.  When Jose does 

receive ESL services, he is pulled out of his language arts class or mathematics class; thus, Jose 

falls further and further behind (Katz, Genesee, Gottlieb, & Malone, 2001).  

Or just imagine being a young vibrant teenaged girl named Sarah, from Afghanistan. 

Sarah recently relocated to Kenosha, Wisconsin and was enrolled in the local neighborhood 

middle school.  She has never attended a formal school and has experienced only a few years of 

schooling secretly conducted in her home.  With Sara’s experiences in mind, she is expected to 

attend school in the U.S., and meet all the same rigorous academic standards and expectations as 

any other English speaking American student, which are mandated and measured by the school, 

the school district, the state and now by the federal government (Midwest Equity Assistance 

Center, 1997).  Without a Newcomers program Jose, Sarah, and other immigrant students in 

similar situations may become lost, overwhelmed, frustrated, and/or even drop out (Brown, 

2000). 

The variety of cultures and languages present many challenges not only for the NEP 

student, but for all parties involved.  School districts, administrators, and teachers are not 

effectively prepared nor equipped to handle newly arrived NEP students.  More specifically, they 

have not been adequately trained with respect to how to address immigrant NEP students’ unique 

cultural, language, and academic needs.  Because of this lack of training, teachers are becoming 

overwhelmed and frustrated as they teach immigrant LEP students (Midwest Equity Assistance 

Center, 1997). School districts, including KUSD, are desperately investigating alternative 

educational programs to assess their new arrivals.  School districts across the nation have 

developed a variety of methodologies for assessment and instruction, including Newcomers 

50

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

programs (ESL Mini Conference, 2002; Friedlander, 1991, Igoa, 1995; Short & Boyson, 2002; 

Short, 1998: Castro, 1980). 

If   linguistically   and   culturally   diverse   students   are   to   gain   long-term 
personal, social and academic success in the United States, their school 
community  must   be   ready  to   help   them   become   productive   through   a 
comprehensive,   challenging,   and   enriching   educational   program   in   the 
mainstream learning environment—this cannot be done in isolation, but 
must be part of a coordinated district effort.  (ESL Mini Conference, 2002, 
p 2)

Newcomers programs were specially designed to cater to the diversified needs of school 

districts’ NEP students and their families.  Newcomers programs originated in the 1970s, when 

California began to pilot special programs catering to its new arrivals.  “Newcomers programs 

were developed as a response to the local needs of the individual school districts, not as the result 

of an integrated state or federal educational policy” (Friedlander, 1991, p. 6).  During the 1990’s, 

California identified seventeen Newcomers programs; Illinois, New Jersey, New York, 

Pennsylvania and Massachusetts followed with similar programs (Friedlander, 1991).  

Today, Newcomers programs are located in eighteen states; most of these 
have high rates of immigration, such as New York, California, and New 
Jersey.     Over   three   fourths   of   the   programs   are   in   urban-metropolitan 
settings; the rest are in suburban areas and rural locales.   More than half 
of the programs operate at the high school level.  About one-third serve the 
middle school level, and the remainder offers a combination of middle and 
high school services.  Most of the schools draw from several attendance 
areas in one school district.  (Short, 1998, p. 1)

Newcomers programs differ from one another in relation to their general structure, 

program design, curriculum, standards, duration, and language of instruction, and entry and exit 

51

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

procedures.  These programs operate as schools within schools, as self-contained schools or 

classrooms, or as a separate site altogether.  Some Newcomers programs include reception or 

intake centers.  They operate full day, half day and at different times, such as the case with after- 

school programs (Castro, 1980; ESL Mini Conference, 2002; Friedlander, 1991, Igoa, 1995; 

Short & Boyson, 2002).  Newcomers programs share a common vision, which includes the 

flowing components: having high academic expectations, and developing English proficiency in 

their students.  They also provide a new student orientation.  Newcomers programs strive to 

develop understanding in a multicultural environment, foster communication, inspire lifelong 

learning, increase self-esteem, and provide for the optimum professional development of their 

staff (Friedlander, 1991). 

Newcomers programs are designed to function as temporary “stopovers" for NEP 

students, until they are ready to be transitioned into their district’s other programs including: 

ESL, bilingual, and/or mainstreamed general education classrooms.  NEP students enrolled in 

Newcomers programs have limited to no English language abilities and have fewer than three 

years of schooling in the United States.  Newcomers programs foster the development of NEP 

students’ English language proficiency.  NEP students attend specialized sheltered English 

classes that are adapted to meet their individual needs.  English is offered as a necessary skill for 

achieving academic success, and for assimilating into an English-speaking community. 

Newcomers programs may serve as a centralized resource center for administrators, 

teachers, students, and parents.  The program's staff is comprised of school personnel, language 

teachers, counselors, community liaisons, interpreters, and office personnel; all staff members 

are specially trained to deal with NEP students.  Oftentimes, these staff members are willing to 

52

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

"go beyond the call of duty" to provide for its NEP students' success (Friedlander, 1991, p. 3). 

By providing a centralized resources center, staff is better equipped to cater to the needs of its 

NEP students.  Furthermore, the students are able to have equitable access to resources during 

the most critical period, or their first few months and years after arrival.  Staff members receive 

training in the effects of students’ native culture with regard to their values, beliefs, perspectives, 

priorities, and behavior.  They understand that their students’ educational experiences, home 

culture, value systems, belief systems, and other factors in their upbringing can all influence 

learning.  This understanding may help to ease their students’ fears and allow for a smoother 

transition period, as they become accustomed to their new home country.   

New arrivals attend orientation classes that introduce the American school systems and its 

culture.  Orientation classes also introduce the following amenities that are available to the 

students: 1) specially designed academic curriculum; 2) counseling services tailored to the 

individual needs of the newcomers; 3) parent education and resources; 4) referral services; 5) 

access to bilingual support services and community liaisons; 6) transportation available to and 

from the centers; 7) extracurricular activities; and 8) tutoring.  Many newcomer centers even 

offer health services and immunizations (ESL Mini Conference, 2002; Friedlander, 1991; Igoa, 

1995; Short & Boyson, 2002).   

53

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Funding of Newcomers programs

One of the most critical issues facing Newcomers programs today is funding.  In order to 

operate successfully, Newcomers programs require funding from the federal government, states, 

school districts, and private sources.  Kathleen Ponze, an assistant principal of New York City’s 

Junior High School 190, wrote a grant and received $50,000 to create a Newcomer after-school 

program.  The following year, the after- school program had to reduce its costs; therefore, the 

program went from having a staff of four English as a second language (ESL) teachers to only 

having one ESL teacher twice a week.  Ponze believes her school's situation is not unique and 

that there are numerous school administrators who have expressed concerns regarding the lack of 

continued program funding (Brown, 2000).

In   1989,   the   Federal   government   mandated   the   Emergency   Immigrant 
Education  Act  (EIEA)  that   allotted   money  for   teacher  training,   books, 
study   aids,   and   other   instructional   expenses   for   immigrant   students. 
However,   immigrant   policies   in   the   1990s   cut   Federal   funding   for 
immigrant school districts almost by 50% while the number of immigrant 
students has increased by nearly 50%.  (Pathways, Immigrant Education, 
2002) 

A large percent of the programs in operation today have received funding from federal, 

state, local, and private sources.  The amount of financial support a program receives depends 

upon the state.  Other sources of funding for Newcomers programs include: educational reforms, 

Elementary and Secondary Education Act (ESEA), Title I, Title III, Title VII, Emergency 

Immigrant Education Programs (EIEP), and Economic Impact Aid.  Aid also comes from literacy 

54

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

funds and tuition from non-resident and out-of- state students (Boyson, 2002; Short & Boyson, 

2002).

The success rate of a program is also related to support from the school district and the 

community.  Beverly Boyson (2002) from the Center of Applied Linguistics stated Newcomers 

programs fail because they are not supported by the district and/or community and rely solely on 

the federal government and/or state for funding.  Furthermore, she added that successful 

programs were the ones that were maintained and financially supported by their local school 

districts and communities.  According to Boyson, the majority of Newcomers programs 

established in the 1980’s and early 1990’s were started with federal and/or state "seed" money, 

but now are primarily relying on operational financial support from their districts and 

communities.  Most of the Newcomers programs established since the fall of 1998 still rely on 

federal and state aid to subsidize the majority of their funds; however, this funding may be short 

lived (Boyson, 2002; Short & Boyson, 2002).

Berkley Public Schools' Bilingual Education Program/Newcomers program, located in 

Berkley, Mississippi, established its Newcomers program in 1976.  During the school year of 

1999-2000, the program was able to receive some federal emergency immigrant funds and state 

bilingual funds; however, it relies mainly on its school district for most of its funds.  County 

Public School’s METS program is located in Rockville, Maryland, established its program in 

1994; it receives 5% of its funding through federal reimbursement and state per pupil- funding; 

and the district generates 90% of its funds.  Miami-Dade County Public Schools’ Project New 

Beginning’s program was established in 1993.  Its funding is primarily by its school district. 

Green Bay’s Area Public Schools’ Newcomers program is located in Wisconsin.  The program 

55

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

was established in 1992 and is fully funded by its district.  Wausau School District, also in 

Wisconsin, offers its new arrivals placement in its Family Newcomers Center.  The program is 

funded by Title VII and district funds (Short & Boyson, 2002).

The lesson for those who would develop a Newcomers program is clear.  At the onset, 

applying for federal funds is prudent.  However, the staff should also garner the support of the 

school district and the surrounding area, whose funds may become necessary when federal funds 

are not available.    

Federal Regulations

Bilingual programs are being closely examined by many sectors of society, due in large 

part to the criticisms being directed at them from the media and several influential organizations 

(Amrein & Pena, 2000).  Proponents of English-only instruction criticize bilingual programs for 

newly arrived immigrants in public schools.  Many of these critics believe that extensive 

instruction in the students' native language may lead to dependence and a delay of appropriate 

grade level instruction (Amrein & Pena, 2000; Hakuta, 2002).  For bilingual programs to be 

effective and successful, school districts, school administrators, and teachers must respond to the 

calls for greater accountability. 

Obtaining adequate research on Newcomers programs has been a long, arduous process 

due to the vast differences in these

 

programs.  The research is often skewed due to the wide 

range of latitude among Federal requirements, which allow states to select the most effective 

programs for their limited English proficient (LEP) student population (Amrein & Pena, 2000). 

56

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

State officials, educational agencies, and courts have also established mandated guidelines on 

educating, governing, and managing LEP students.  The actual programs being offered can vary 

from state to state, district to district, school to school, and classroom to classroom (Amrein & 

Pena, 2000; Hakuta, 2002).  Therefore, comparing these programs is difficult.

However, school districts are not free from federal and state laws that dictate specific 

approaches when designing special programs for newcomer immigrant students.  Some federal 

laws have addressed the issue of how to best educate LEP and NEP students.  A Supreme Court 

case (Lau v. Nicholas, 1974) required that schools provide special language aid to students from 

families in which English was not spoken.  In Guadalupe v. Temple, 1978, the Ninth Circuit 

Court of Appeals clarified the issues of language assistance raised in Lau v. Nichols.  The 

Appelate Court explicitly stated that “bilingual education” was not required under the US 

Constitution or the 1964 Civil Rights Act, and that providing extra support in English was 

meeting districts’ obligations by adequately satisfying the requirements of Lau v. Nichols 

(English for the Children, 2002; ELLKBase, 2002; NCLEA, 2002).  

This issue of bilingual versus English-only instruction continues to be heavily debated 

today.  Federal law requires school districts to take every available legal action necessary to 

assure its NEP/LEP students are offered the same educational opportunities as native-born 

students.  The law does not dictate how districts are to implement programs; school districts are 

able to implement changes that are guided by their local and demographic needs (English for the 

Children, 2002; ELLKBase, 2002; NCLEA, 2002).  School districts receiving federal funding of 

their Newcomers programs must adhere to and comply with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 

1964.  Those school districts receiving federal funding are prohibited from engaging in 

57

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

discriminating in programs or activities on the basis of race, color, or national origin (English for 

the Children, 2002; ELLKBase, 2002; NCLEA, 2002).  In 1990, the OCR investigated a 

Newcomer School and determined the school to be in compliance with Title VI based on 

numerous factors: 

The District was not under a court or administrative order to desegregate 
its schools.  The program was a voluntary program.  The District offered 
enrollment to their immigrant students in either their home school or their 
Newcomers   school.     These   students’  home   schools   offered   language 
assistance.     The   Newcomer   school   student   population   make-up   was 
multicultural and multilingual.  Students were from a variety of different 
countries and spoke different languages.  Attendance was limited to more 
than one year.  Eligibility was based on a need for language and cultural 
assistance.   The Districts programs offered were made available for all 
students enrolled at the Newcomers school and were comparable to those 
offered throughout the District’s other schools.  (NCLEA, 2002, p. 20)

Congressional policies are affecting the outcome of Newcomers programs by having an 

impact upon both content and funding.  The “No Child Left Behind Act of 2001” dictated certain 

requirements that schools must address; however, it failed to clarify which language programs 

will best educate immigrant students.  In the case of Kathleen Ponze from NYC Junior High 

School 190, an initial grant ran its course and was not replaced by additional federal funding. 

Stringent federal guidelines on funding have made it rather difficult for the majority of school 

districts to qualify for additional funding, causing school districts to drastically cut and/or 

restructure their districts’ language programs.  Today the vast majority of programs are funded 

from the school district’s general education or bilingual education funds (Pathways, Immigrant 

Education, 2002). 

58

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Additional Research Needed

Obtaining adequate research on Newcomers programs is rather difficult. 

Despite the growing interest in Newcomers programs, no comprehensive 
national study of them had been undertaken prior to this 4-year CREDE 
project (1996-2000), neither for evaluating their impact, nor for providing 
guidance   to   school   districts   considering   establishing   a   Newcomers 
program.  (Short & Boyson, 2002, p.1)

The majority of Newcomers programs are in their infancy stage; they are continuously evolving 

and are difficult to monitor and/or track.  Gathering statistical information on Newcomers 

programs is also difficult to obtain because the participants are NEP, and they are often exempt 

from taking state and/or district mandated standardized assessment(s) (ESL Min Conference, 

2002; Friedlander, 1991; Igoa, 1995; Short & Boyson, 2002).  This target population is often 

transient, and its attrition rate is high.  The high attrition rate is due to the fact that NEP students 

are not housed in Newcomers programs for their entire academic careers.  School districts have 

set mandates and established specified time limits on how long their NEP students can be housed 

in its Newcomers programs.  On average, NEP students can be enrolled for no longer than two 

academic quarters and/or one to two years depending on the program's goals and objectives 

(Friedlander, 1991). 

Additional academic research is needed on Newcomers programs.  School districts and 

researchers must begin to conduct quantitative comparative longitudinal studies and qualitative 

case studies on Newcomers programs in order to evaluate the programs' effectiveness and to 

59

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

determine if they are meeting the immediate educational needs of their NEP students (NCLEA, 

2002).  The Center for Applied Linguistics (2000) began summarizing data on 115 secondary 

Newcomers programs operated in 29 states and the District of Columbia.  The 115 programs 

mentioned in the study operate in 196 areas, meaning that some programs have multiple 

locations within a district.  The result was the creation of a directory that reports on the basic 

operation of Newcomers programs.  Over fifty percent of the exemplary programs are located in 

California, New Jersey, New York, and Texas (Short & Boyson, 2002).  Other than the 

aforementioned directory, there is a lack of research published on the Newcomers programs 

operating nationwide.  This is fertile ground for future educational research.   

Exemplar Newcomers Programs

In South Sioux City, Nebraska, Newcomers classrooms are located offsite at two 

elementary schools.  Newcomers classrooms were designed for its district’s NEP newly arrived 

students (with less than one year in the U.S.) who have little or no English proficiency, and/or 

low literacy skills in their primary language.  Sixteen NEP students attend the program in half-

day increments; elementary NEP students (Grades 3-5) attend in the afternoon, and secondary 

NEP students attend the morning session.  A waiting list is created when the classroom is full. 

Students may be exited from the Newcomers classroom when they reach a predetermined 

language level and academic proficiency to participate in regular ESL classes at their home 

schools (determined by the LAS assessments).  LAS is the acronym for the Language Assessment 

60

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Scales published by CTB McGraw Hill; it is used by some school districts to assess oral, reading 

and writing skills of non-native English-speaking students.  Secondary students are only exited at 

the end of a term, but no longer than one academic year or less.  This Newcomers program offers 

a specialized curriculum in English language development, and an introduction to the district’s 

schools, its policies, the communities it services, and the United States.  The program offers a 

multicultural education, which encourages NEP students to maintain pride in their culture; it 

offers equitable access to the district’s programs and resources (

www.helpforschools.com

, 2002).

The staff of the Newcomers classroom includes an ESL teacher and a bilingual 

paraprofessional.  Communication between the staff and the home school is critical.  The 

communication helps to ensure the NEP student's placement in an appropriate academic program 

and assists in effective transitioning for the student.  The mainstream teacher is accountable for 

his/her students' academic progress, although they are housed only part-time at the Newcomers 

classroom.  It is imperative to note that the Newcomers classroom does not replace the home 

school curriculum; it only enhances the English Language development of the LEP student 

(

www.helpforschools.com

, 2002).

The South Sioux City School District also has an Orientation Center.  The primary 

function of this center is to provide additional educational resources for the district’s NEP/LEP 

students, families, and staff.  The Orientation Center registers and assesses any student who 

indicated a language other than English on the District’s Home Language Survey.  The staff 

collaborates with other district staff on appropriate placement for its NEP/LEP students. 

Referrals are made for the families, and translators are provided in this center.  The center acts as 

a liaison for the students and families between their classrooms and home schools; it also aids in 

61

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Student Assistant Teams and/or staffings.  The staff provides teachers with classroom support, 

modifications, additional assessments, and training on various topics.  The center also acts as a 

liaison to local colleges to help develop training for teachers in ESL (www.helpforschools.com, 

2002).

The South Sioux City School District’s LEP kindergarten students are serviced in its 

traditional Kindergarten classroom with a paraprofessional, and if needed, these students receive 

access to all the District’s resources.  The LEP students who score at Level 1 or 2 on the LAS 

assessment are offered additional help and placement in the extended day Kindergarten to 

receive additional language support with the District’s ESL teacher and the ESL 

paraprofessional.  The Kindergarten program emphasizes socialization and English proficiency 

(www.helpforschools.com, 2002).  Once the LEP students exit their Newcomers classrooms, they 

are placed into the mainstreamed classroom and are pulled out for additional ESL support in 

grades 1-12 (www.helpforschools.com, 2002). 

Cesar E. Chavez Multicultural Academic Center is a Newcomers program located in 

Chicago, Illinois and established in 1996.  The program is funded by Federal Title VII funds, 

private funds, and small grants from the educational reform.  The center offers its new arrivals 

(fewer than 3 years of enrollment in a U.S. school) a year round, full-day (also after-school) 

academic program in bilingual education or in ESL.  The new arrivals must have large 

educational gaps in their formal schooling and speak little to no English.  Currently there are 

sixty NEP students enrolled in the Newcomers program, and all of them qualify for free or 

reduced lunches.  NEP students can attend the Transitional Bilingual Educational (TBE) program 

at the middle school, which was designed for older immigrant and refugee students who 

62

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

traditionally have more difficulty adjusting to their new environment and language.  TBE does 

not maintain the goal of the students to be bilingual.  Ideally, the students’ native language is 

used in the classroom only until NEP/LEP students acquire enough English, and then they are 

transitioned into English-only classes.  NEP/LEP students are housed in the program throughout 

their middle school years.  To exit the program, students must meet certain criteria in English 

and/or Spanish and in mathematics.  The Cesar Chavez Newcomers Program offers specially 

designed academic classes to enhance its students' English language development, and an 

orientation class to the Chicago Public School system.  As of the 1999-2000 school year, all 

NEP/LEP students attending were from Latin America and Poland.  The staff is comprised of 

teachers who loop all three years with their students; in addition, there is one full-time teacher 

who works directly with the parents, handles discipline, facilitates individual student support, 

registers and tests students, and gives general education support (Short & Boyson, 2002).

The International Newcomer Center is located at Taft High School, in Chicago, Illinois 

(1998).  This full-day immigrant program houses NEP high school students from the ages of 

fourteen to seventeen years who are new arrivals (less than 12 months in the U.S.), have limited 

English proficiency, and low literacy skills in their primary language.  The average class size is 

fifteen, with students representing twenty-four different countries and fifteen non-English 

languages.  The International Newcomer Center Taft High School is funded through state and 

district funds as well as a private grant.  The International Newcomer Center has the same 

primary goals and objectives as other Newcomers programs, with one unique attribute: it 

incorporates the arts into learning English.  After being enrolled for two semesters, students are 

expected to return to their home schools (Short & Boyson, 2002). 

63

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Project Great Start Community Consolidated School District 15 Newcomers Interim 

Service Center (NISC) is located in Rolling Meadows, Illinois.  Developed in 1997, the center is 

an intake center that assists its district in the assessment and placement of newly arrived 

NEP/LEP students.  The program offers placement for its NEP students in two classes.  The 

Newcomers Class I provides an intensive survival English language development class, a variety 

of academics, U.S. culture, and an orientation to U.S. schools; this program houses its NEP 

students for no more than two months.  Participation in the Newcomers Class II lasts for up to 

four months and is a continuum of the first course, but it focuses more on skill development in 

English (Short & Boyson, 2002).

Irvine Unified School District is located in Orange County, California; the District offers 

its Newcomers an opportunity to participate in their Magnet Newcomers Program - English 

Language Development (ELD) classrooms (1984).  The primary goal of its program is to provide 

a nurturing environment and language support for the District’s NEP/LEP students.  The 

eligibility requirements are similar to other Newcomers programs.  The program is now available 

at all grade levels (K-12).  The enrollment period is for a minimal period of one semester.  NEP 

students are released to their home schools once they have made academic progress on the 

California English Language Development Test (CELDT).  Parents are able to waive their child 

out of attending this program and may opt to enroll their child in their home school or other 

schools offering ESL support.  In 1998, the District surveyed program participant parents, and 

ninety-five percent of the parents indicated they were satisfied with the program’s success (Irvine 

School District, 2002).

64

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Folsom Cordova Unified School District is located in Folsom, California.  Its Newcomers 

program is offered to NEP students in grades 1-12; Kindergarten students are placed in regular 

educational classrooms and are serviced by the ESL staff.  The NEP immigrant student 

population has grown immensely.  In the early 1980’s, there was an influx of political refugees 

from China and Vietnam.  Immigrant students make up about one percent of the total student 

population of Irvine.  As of 1999, the predominant language groups were from the former Soviet 

Union: Russian, Ukrainian, Armenian, Moldvan, and Belarus.  These NEP/LEP students, along 

with Spanish speaking students, represent a total of 16 % of Folsom Cordova Unified School 

District’s student population, or an estimated 900 students.  These students are classified as 

recent arrivals with fewer than three years of schooling in the U.S.  The District has about sixty 

different languages represented in its language programs.  Folsom’s success rate is excellent; 

two-thirds of its LEP students are reclassified as fluent English proficient (FEP) within five years 

of U.S. entry.  On standardized assessments, about one half of these students perform at or above 

grade level in reading comprehension and in math.  Between the years 1994-1998, its LEP 

students superceded growth by two normal curves equivalents for reading and seven normal 

curves for math (Folsom Cordova USD, 1999). 

 In Emporia, Kansas, the Literacy Center, also known as Dos Puente’s Newcomer 

Literacy Center, provides instruction for its NEP students who are new arrivals (less than 12 

months in the U.S.), have limited English proficiency, and low literacy skills in their primary 

language.  The entry criteria for NEP students in grades K-3 are those who scored below a 2 on 

the English Pre-LAS or LAS.  The district's new students are identified, tested, and referred to 

the Literacy Center within four weeks of their enrollment in their home school.  The center 

65

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

utilizes a variety of instructional strategies including: whole language, writing process, thematic 

interdisciplinary designs, cooperative centers, learning centers, multiple learning styles, 

mathematics with manipulatives, performances based learning, scientific inquiry, technology, and 

portfolio assessments (Emporia Unified School District, 2002).  

Kenosha Unified School District

The Kenosha Unified School District needs to implement a centralized Newcomers 

intake center.  In 2002-2003, Kenosha Unified School District, (the District), the third largest 

school district in Wisconsin, enrolled over 21,000 students, and offered its Language Assistance 

Program (LAP) services to over 1,340 LEP students at all grade levels.  This count was 

according to Wisconsin’s “Third Friday in September Enrollment Count.”  However, due to the 

“No Child Left Behind Act of 2001”, and Wisconsin DPI’s new English language levels and 

“cut” scores, more students are now being classified or redesignated as being NEP/LEP in the 

District.  As of March 2003, the District identified and assessed an additional 700 NEP/LEP 

students.  The District is averaging ten to fifteen new arrivals per month (KUSD, 2003).  There 

are nearly thirty different languages represented in the District’s language assistance programs 

and its schools.  The majority of LEP students housed within the District’s LAPs are Spanish and 

Arabic speakers.

Like other school districts, KUSD is facing some major dilemmas.  First, the district is 

being scrutinized by the Office of Civil Rights (OCR).  The District’s LEP students are not being 

identified and assessed within the ten-day timeframe as indicated in its OCR Action Plan.  Its 

66

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

LEP students are left to “sink or swim" in its mainstreamed classrooms, with non-certified 

Bilingual/ESL teachers.  Its LEP students are often housed for weeks or months before they are 

even identified or offered placement in the District’s language programs.  Once the District offers 

placement to its 700+ newly identified NEP/LEP students, it will not have the facilities or the 

staff to adequately service these students.  The District’s LAPs are overcrowded, and its facilities 

are limited.  

The number of students served by the Newcomers programs ranges from 
14 at one site in Connecticut to over 740 at a high school in New York 
City.   Almost half of the programs enroll 50 or more students, and 12 
programs serve over 200 students.  Because of limited resources, not all 
Newcomers programs are able to serve all eligible students in the district. 
(Short, 1998, p. 1)

The District’s LAPs are understaffed and/or overburdened.  The turnover rate for its LAP 

staff is rather high; one program had two teachers out of six (or thirty-three percent) resign 

during the first week of school.  The District’s LAP classrooms are the only classes within the 

District to have split grade level classes (K/1, 2/3 and 4/5).  Some classes are filled to capacity 

and are conducted in inadequate classrooms.  These factors affect the quality of the education 

that is being provided to LEP students.  The District’s LAP staff members are working overtime, 

often without additional remuneration.  LAP staff members give up their prep and lunch periods 

to help out with the language assessments, placements, and the monitoring of transitional 

students.  The LAP staff assists with translations, adult ESL education, and staff development.  In 

addition, the staff addresses the diverse needs of its LEP students such as making referrals to 

government agencies, seeking food and clothing, and arranging for transportation.   

67

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Throughout the U.S., teachers are struggling to find resources to meet the educational 

needs of their LEP students, and Kenosha Unified is no different.  Like other teachers nationally, 

the District’s teachers are feeling overwhelmed and pressured because of all the implications of 

the “No Child Left Behind Act of 2001” and the high stakes standardized assessments that are 

required.  LEP students are faced with rigorous assessments that measure their academic 

proficiency in English.  Schools in Wisconsin are being put on the “Watch-Lists” and are being 

subjected to closure or restructuring if their students do not meet the state's rigorous standards 

(Brown, 2000). 

By adopting the best practices of the exemplar programs studied, KUSD can best serve 

its large NEP/LEP student population.  If KUSD had a centralized Newcomers program, officials 

would be able to administer new and annual language assessments.  By properly identifying and 

assessing its LEP students in a timely manner, students will no longer be misidentified or simply 

neglected.  Newly arrived NEP students could be housed for a minimum of two semesters, or 

until they would reach a level of fluency (Level 2), and they are able to successfully transition 

into the District’s other language assistance programs (Sheltered English Immersion, Transitional 

Educational Bilingual, and/or ESL).  By educating NEP students in the district's language 

assistance programs or mainstreamed classes, the success of its NEP/LEP students may be 

sacrificed.  

NEP students do not have the language skills necessary to function in traditional 

Sheltered English Immersion, Transitional Educational Bilingual, and/or ESL classrooms.  These 

students are in the pre-productive stage of second language acquisition.  In this stage of 

development, NEP students will often use their home language to communicate.  When everyone 

68

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

around them is speaking a different language, such as English, they will stop speaking entirely 

out of frustration, or they will speak only their native language.  After receiving no response, 

these students will quit speaking in their native language.  Then, students may go through a 

period of not talking at all; this period is referred to as the "Silent Period.”  This phase may be 

brief or it may last up to a year.  Even though they are not talking in English at this time, they are 

absorbing the language and will attempt to communicate through non-verbal gestures or mimes 

(Wisconsin DPI, 2000).  Obviously, this process makes educating these students in a variety of 

required subjects very difficult to accomplish.  

Having a centralized Newcomers program allows the District’s resources to be readily 

available to the staff, student, and families.  The Newcomers program team members could be 

comprised of the following: the Bilingual Community Liaison, translators, bilingual social 

workers, bilingual guidance counselors, and nurses, as well as other community outreach 

personnel.  The District’s immigrant NEP students would be able to receive an educational 

opportunity that is individualized and tailored to meet their own diverse needs.  

Students would be referred to the center during registration.  Parents complete the 

PHLOTE (Primary or Home Language Other Than English) form, which indicates whether their 

child speaks a language other than English, is new to the country, or is unable to converse in 

English.  The school site secretary would notify the District’s Newcomers center administrator of 

the students who meet these qualifications.  At the District’s Newcomers center, NEP/LEP 

students would be assessed within ten working days of enrollment.  The Newcomers staff would 

be responsible for completing all the assessments and paperwork for each newly arrived student. 

The LAP team would then decide on appropriate program placements, send parental notifications 

69

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

of placement, and arrange placement and /or transportation for students.  At the elementary 

school, the Newcomers staff and principal would be able to discuss the appropriate grade 

placement and academic schedule of the NEP/LEP student, taking into account the student’s 

academic history, English language proficiency, and native country school records.  At the 

middle and high school level, the intake language assistance staff and bilingual guidance 

counselor would be able to discuss the appropriate grade placement and academic schedule of 

the LEP student.  All LEP students would be offered placement in the District’s LAPs based on 

whether or not they meet the requirements of the DPI and the District.  The District’s LAPs 

would continue to be completely voluntary.  Parents may request to withdraw or deny services 

for their LEP child at anytime during the program.  If this request to withdraw happens, the 

parents must complete a waiver of services (or withdrawal) form. 

In addition, the Newcomers program staff would be responsible for teaching the District’s 

NEP (Level 1) students, and completing Individual Language record Plans (ILRP), as well as 

monitoring its mainstreamed DPI (Level 4-7) students.  Students who are identified as Levels 2-3 

would be offered placement in the District’s language assistance programs: Sheltered English 

Immersion, Transitional Educational Bilingual, and/or ESL.  Levels 4-5 would remain at their 

home schools and continued to be monitored and serviced by the District’s language assistance 

staff.  The staff  would utilize a variety of instructional strategies to include the following: whole 

language, writing process, thematic interdisciplinary designs, cooperative centers, learning 

centers, multiple learning styles, mathematics with manipulatives, performances based learning, 

scientific inquiry, technology, and portfolio assessments.  Teachers and other classroom staff 

would receive initial and regular training in the viable methodologies from the center’s staff. 

70

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

The center would act as a liaison for its students' families between their classrooms and home 

schools; staff would also aid in Student Assistant Teams and/or staffing.  The staff would provide 

administrators and teachers with classroom support, modifications, additional assessments, and 

staff training on various topics as well as act as a liaison to local colleges to help develop training 

for teachers in English as a second language (helpforschools.com, 2002).  

Conclusion

Whether or not KUSD adopts a Newcomers program is truly not the issue.  The reality of 

the problem is that 700+ NEP/LEP students’ educational needs are not currently being met.  The 

District must do a better job of addressing unique needs of its newly arrived immigrant students. 

Having students waiting in mainstreamed classrooms for weeks and/or months for placement in 

the District’s language assistance programs is not acceptable. 

The  Wisconsin   Constitution   (Article   X.   3)  states  that   every Wisconsin 
student has the fundamental right to an equal opportunity for a sound basic 
education, which is defined as ‘one that will equip students for their roles 
as   citizens   and   enable   them   to   succeed   economically   and   personally.’ 
(Wisconsin DPI, 2002, p. 9) 

The challenges facing school districts are not insurmountable as long as school districts 

do not become complacent.  School districts must take their responsibilities seriously and 

educate all immigrant students effectively regardless of their English language abilities and/or or 

content area knowledge limitations.  States, administrators, and teachers must recognize that 

71

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

there are outside determining factors that play an integral role in the success of immigrants’ 

attainment of English.  These factors include the student's age upon arrival and educational and 

personal background; these factors are especially true of secondary students, who face greater 

challenges, and higher dropout rates.  District officials must take appropriate action to educate 

every immigrant student within their realm. 

Newcomers programs are just one of many language programs designed to aid school 

districts in meeting their newly arrived immigrants students’ needs, by placing recent immigrant 

students who have limited English proficiency and limited educational experience in their native 

countries into a specialized academic environment separate from native English-speaking 

students for a limited period of time (usually from six months to two years).  These programs 

have encountered many challenges, including the following: locating sources of funding, helping 

students who have had interrupted education and/or little or low literacy skills, integrating 

students into their home schools and into their communities; and transporting eligible students to 

the program site (Short & Boyson, 2002).  In spite of the inherent challenges, school districts 

who have adopted Newcomers programs are building culturally responsive schools with 

classrooms that are flexible in that they are able to accommodate its students with academic, 

linguistic, and cultural differences.  Despite these differences, these students attending 

Newcomers programs are beginning to build trust, take risks, and appreciate their peers and adult 

role models, particularly those who respect and treat them fairly.  These programs employ 

sensitive and tolerant teachers who understand the diverse immigrant cultures at play.  At the 

classroom level, teachers and mainstreamed students get to know these new students and 

appreciate the assets they bring to school.  Newcomers programs help immigrant NEP students to 

72

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

learn the skills needed to become proficient in English and fully participate in commerce, 

government, and education in the United States.  Society benefits from the skills and abilities 

that these new residents bring, as their choice of future occupations widens dramatically thanks 

to the superior education that they receive upon their arrival. 

It is important to understand that these students are going through difficult adjustment 

periods, linguistically and socially, in addition to the typical pre-adolescent and adolescent 

developmental stages.  Additionally, family members provide an anchor for the students, but they 

are also adjusting to a new country.  The more open, understanding, and encouraging teachers 

and schools can be toward these families, the better off the students and schools will be in the 

long run.  These students are not likely to succeed unless they feel accepted and respected, even 

if they sometimes do not fit the expectations of their classrooms, schools, and larger 

communities.  Through tolerance and acceptance, educators can facilitate these newcomers' 

ultimate transition into American society.    

References

73

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Amrein, A. & Pena, R. (2000).  Asymmetry in dual language practice: Assessing imbalance in a 

program promoting equality.  Retrieved April 4, 2003, from 
http://epaa.asu.edu/epaa/v8n8.html.

Andrade, Rosi, Civil, Marta et al (2002). Linking home and school: A bridge to many faces 

mathematics. A final report. Center for Research on Education, Diversity and Excellence. 
Retrieved September 1, 2002, from http://www.crede.ucsc.edu/research/md/4.2es.html.

Avila, O. (2002, February 26).  New centers try to soften immigrants’ school shock.  Critics say 

concept isolates students. Chicago Tribune.   

Berube, B. (2002, September/October/November).  Three Rs for ESL instruction in U.S. rural 

schools: A test of commitment. TESOL Matters, 12(4). 

Boyson, B. Center for Applied Linguistics. 4646 40th Street NW. Washington, DC 20016-1859. 

Tel. 202-362-0700.  Personal communication, October 16, 2002. 

Brown, K. (2000).  Newcomers learn English.  Education News for an Educated Public. 

Education Update Online.  Retrieved November 1, 2002, from 
http://www.educationupdate.com/may00/Newcomers.html.

Castenada v. Pickard, 648 F 2d 989 (5th Cir. 1981). 

Center for Research on Education, Diversity & Excellence (CREDE) (2001, September). Some 

program alternatives for English language learners. Retrieved November 1, 2002, from 
CREDE: http://www.cal.org/crede/pubs/PracBrief3.htm.

74

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Crawford, J. (1997, March).  Best evidence: Foundations of the Bilingual Education Act. 

National Clearinghouse for Bilingual Education. Retrieved November 2, 2002, from 
http://www.ncela.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/reports/bestevidence/research.htm#M.

Crawford, J. (1997).  Best evidence: Research foundations of Bilingual Education Act. Retrieved 

November 2, 2002, from 

http://www.ncborgwu.edu

.

Crawford, J. (1998, Winter).  Rethinking schools- Does Bilingual Education work?  Retrieved 

November 2, 2002, from http://

 

 

www.rethinkingschools.org/Archieves/13-02/biside.htm

 

 .

Department of Education, Office of Civil Rights –OCR (1999).  Retrieved October 22, 2002 

from http://www.ed.gov/offices/OCR/ELL/index.html.

Duignan, Peter. (2001). Hoover essay. Bilingual education: A critique. Retrieved September 6, 

2002, from http://www.hooverstandfordedu./publications/he/22/22d.html.

ELLKBase- The English Language Learner Knowledgebase. A Framework for Alternative 

Language Programs [Data file].  Region VII Comprehensive Center. Retrieved 
September 4, 2002, from 
http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/practitionerstips/Framework_ALP.shtml.

Emporia Unified School District: EUSD (2002). Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 

http://www.usd253.org/

 

 

.

  

English for the Children (1998, February).  Falsehoods and facts about "English for the 

children." In English for the Children. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4255.

The English Language Learner Knowledgebase.  A framework for alternative language 

programs [Data file]. Region VII Comprehensive Center.  Retrieved October 22, 2002, 
from 
http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/practitionerstips/Framework_ALP.shtml.

ESL Mini Conference. Building inclusive elementary school communities for ELLs. New 

Jersey's HELP program wins "Best Practices" award.  Retrieved September 4, 2002 from 
http://www.eslminiconf.net/june/story24.html.

Ethnic groups in Wisconsin: Historical background. Retrieved on October 26, 2002, from 

http://wiscinfo.doit.wisc.edu/mkilibrary/ethn-his.html. 

Farmington Public Schools. Farmington Public Schools curriculum. Retrieved October 26, 2002, 

from http://www.farmington.k12.mi.us/district/curriculum/bilingual.html.

75

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Folsom Cordova USD (2002). Folsom Cordova Unified School District, 125 East Bidwell Street, 

Folsom, CA  95630 Retrieved September 3, 2002 from http://www.fcusd.k12.ca.us/.

Friedlander, M. (Fall, 1991).  The Newcomers program: Helping immigrant students succeed in 

U.S. schools. NCBE Program Information Guide Series, No. 8.  Retrieved November 1, 
2002, from http://ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/pigs/pig8.htm

 

 ;   

http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/refernces/NEWCOMERPROGRAMTableCo.

Genesee, F. (1998).  Program alternatives for linguistically diverse students. Retrieved November 

1, 2002, from Center for Applied Linguistic: http://www.cal.org/crede/newcomer.htm.

Guipana, C. (1998).  Culture shock.  Department of Counseling and Psychology. San Diego State 

University.  

Hakuta, K. (2001, April 13).  The Education of language minority students.  Paper presented at 

United States Commission on Civil Rights.  Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Docs/CivilRightsCommision.htm.

Hakuta, K. (2002).  Improving education for all children: meeting the needs of language 

minority children.  Retrieved August 6, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Aspen.html

.     

Hakuta, K. (2002, August 29).  What can we learn about the impact of Proposition 227 from 

SAT-9 scores.  Retrieved September 8, 2002, from http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Heine, H. (2003). Culturally responsible schools for Micronesians immigrant students. Retrieved 

on April 11,2003, from http://www.prel.org/teams/culturally-responsive.asp. 

Hispanics, Asians gain in Census. (2001, March 9).  The groups' populations surge as new figures 

for four states show a blurring of racial and ethnic lines. Tucson Citizen. Retrieved October 
26, 2002, from http://www.tucsoncitizen.com/local/census/3_9_01n_census.html.

Igoa, C. (1995). The inner world of the immigrant child. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Earlbaum.

Irvine School District (2002).  Retrieved on November 1, 2002, from ISD: www.iusd.k12ca.us.

Johnston, R. C.  & Viadero, D. (2002, March 15).  Unmet promise: Raising minority 

achievement.  Education week, 19(27), 1-19.

 

Katz, A., Genesee, F., Gottlieb, M., & Malone, M.  (2001).  Scenarios for ESL standards-based 

assessment.  Alexandria: Teachers of English to Speakers of Other Languages.

Kenosha Unified School District Five-Year Long Range Committee (2003).  Kenosha Unified 

76

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

School District No. 1, Kenosha, WI.  

  

Krashen, Stephen. (2001). Term limits. Class dismissed. Retrieved October 21, 2002, from 

http://www.americas.org/News/Features/200112

 

 -  

_Blingual_Education/2001110_letters.htm.  

Legge, C. (2000, June). Federal Court Decision. In Decision by Judge Charles Legge: Refusing 

to Delay the Effective Date of Proposition 227 by U.S. District Judge Charles A. Legge. 
San Francisco: Federal Court Decision. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID-7776.

Midwest Equity Assistance Center (1997).  Variety of programs helps newcomers adjust to U.S. 

Schools. Retrieved November 1, 2002, from MEAC: 

http://mdac.educ.ksu.edu?MDAC/resource/horizons/AugSept97/articles/newcomers/html

 

 

.

  

Moyers, S. (1993, January).  Bridging the culture gap. Instructor, 31-33.  

The National ClearingHouse for English Language Acquisition and Language Instruction 

Educational Programs (NCELA) (1991/92-2001/02).  The growing number of limited 
English proficient students. Retrieved November 26, 2002, from 

http://www.ncela.gwu.edu./states/stateposter.pdf

.

National Clearinghouse for English Language Acquisition, NCLEA (2002), retrieved September 

4, 2002, from   

http://www.ncela.gwu.edu./

 

    .

No Child Left Behind Act of 2001. Title I sec. 1111(b)(3)(C)(x).

OnWisonsin.com. State Hispanic population. Retrieved November 3, 2002, from 

http://www.jsonline.com/news/census2000/mar01/LATINO10g2.asp.

Pabst, G. (2001, March 9).  Hispanics find that state has a winning formula good economy, jobs, 

family ties help lure many Latinos here.  Milwaukee Journal Sentinel. Retrieved 
November 26, 2002, from 
http://www.jsonline.com/news/census2000/mar01/latino030901gx.asp#top.

Pathways, Immigrant Education (2002).  ERIC Clearinghouse on Urban Education.  Retrieved 

November 27, 2002, from http://eric-web.tc.columbia.edu/path.asp.

Resource VIII-Overview of key ESEA Programs.  Retrieved on September 6, 2002, from 

http://www.ed.gov/pubs/Idea_Planning/resource_8.html.   

Schwartz, W. (1996, November).  Immigrants and their educational attainment: Some facts and 

77

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

findings. Eric Clearinghouse on Urban Education, 116.  Retrieved December 12, 2002, 
from 

http://eric-web.tc.columbia.edu/digests/dig116.asp

.  

Short, D. & Boyson, B. (2000). Center for Research on Education, Diversity & Excellence 

(CREDE). Summary of data in secondary newcomer directory.  Center for Applied 
Linguistic.  Retrieved July 29,2002 from 

http://www.cal.org/crede/newsummary.htm

.

Short, D. & Boyson, B. (2002) Center for Research on Education, Diversity & Excellence 

(CREDE).  Newcomers: Language and academic programs for recent immigrants. Center 
for Applied Linguistic. Retrieved July 29, 2002 from 

http://www.cal.org/crede/newsummary.htm

.

Short, D. (1998).  Secondary Newcomers programs: Helping recent immigrants prepare for 

school success. ERIC Digest (ED#411703). Washington, DC: ERIC Clearinghouse on 
Languages and Linguistics, from 

http://www.cal.org/crede/newcomer.htm

.

Short, D. J. (2002).  Newcomers programs: An educational alternative for secondary immigrant 

students. Education and Urban Society 34(2), 173-198. Retrieved July 29, 2002 from 
http://www.cal.org/crede/newcomer.htm.

United States Department of Education, Office of Civil rights Programs for English Language 

Learners. Retrieved July 29, 2002, from http://www.ed.gov/offices/OCR/ELL.html.

United States Census 2000. Wisconsin Latino population, by community.  Milwaukee Journal 

Sentinel.  March 9, 2001 Retrieved November 26, 2002, from 
http://www.jsonline.com/news/census2000/mar01/latino030901gx.asp#top.

West Bloomfield School District, West Bloomfield, MI. Retrieved November 26, 2002, from 

http://www.westbloomfield.k12mi.us/newcomer.html.

Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction (DPI) Retrieved November 26, 2002, from 

http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/dpi/dlsea/title1/index.html.

The Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction. (2002). Legal Responsibilities when serving 

Limited-English -Proficient (LEP) students in K-12 public schools. Retrieved from 
http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/dpi/dlsea/equity/biling.html.

World Population Sheet. (2003). Retrieved on April 11, 2003 from 

http://www.prb.org/

.

 

78

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

QUESTION 3

Analyze how bilingual education has developed and changed during the last decade. 
Explore the impact of bilingual education on meeting the needs of Hispanic students. 
Has bilingual education successfully addressed the various issues of limited English 
speakers?  What areas need to be addressed by bilingual educators in order to 
successfully meet the needs of limited English speakers, in particular, Hispanic students?

The Bilingual Movement

The Bilingual Movement began in the 1960s as a part of the Civil Rights 

Movement.  Prior to early 1960s, bilingual education waned because the U.S. educational 

system was recovering from the effects of two World Wars.  Immigrants during this time 

came primarily from European nations and were more economically affluent.  Their 

children had more access to formal education in their native countries.  Historically, the 

principle motivators for foreigners relocating to the United States were economic, 

political, and/or familial.  Assimilation into larger society was necessary in order to gain 

employment and to survive.  To this day, immigrants tend to settle in neighborhoods that 

are representative of their language, culture, and/or socioeconomic status (Duignan, 

2001; Education World, 1998; Spring, 1996). 

In the 1950s and early 1960s, major international events helped to renew an 

interest in language instruction, particularly after the Soviets launched their first artificial 

earth satellite, called the Sputnik, in 1958.  Throughout the nation, curriculum reform 

efforts resulted in a renewed interest in foreign language instruction.  During this time, 

79

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

the Cuban Revolution caused many to flee to the U. S.  These new residents settled 

Southern Florida.  These Spanish-speaking residents caused bilingual educational 

programs to be introduced into U.S. public schools.  Bilingual programs 

(English/Spanish) also began to emerge and set precedence throughout the Southwestern 

part of the U.S. (California, New Mexico, and Texas) (Duignan, 2001; Education World, 

1998; Spring, 1996). 

Congressional Acts and judicial rulings of the 1960s and 1970s served to increase 

interest and support of bilingual programs.  Throughout this time, the immigration 

population began to increase with the largest number of emigrants arriving from Mexico, 

and countries in Central and South America.  Minorities in the 1960s demanded equal 

rights as part of the Civil Rights Movement.  Minorities and others fought forced 

segregation, and discrimination in housing and employment.  Many Hispanic community 

members were outraged by the inequality of the educational system.  The educational 

system had far fewer Hispanic educators, and Hispanics began to demand more 

representation in education (and in the government), so that their issues would be 

addressed (Castellanos, 1983; Duignan, 2001; Education World, 1998; Spring, 1996).  

During this time of civil unrest, Senator Ralph Yarborough of Texas was in fear of 

losing the election of 1970, and desperately needed the Hispanic vote to win; it would be 

a critical factor in his victory.  In order to win the Hispanic vote, Yarborough was 

appointed to a special subcommittee for bilingual education, which was part of the larger 

Senate Committee of Labor and Public Welfare.  This committee launched a series of 

80

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

hearings in many Hispanic communities.  Yarborough spearheaded support for programs 

that advocated the need for bilingual education, for Spanish speakers.  Legislation was 

also introduced to fund educational programs that encouraged knowledge and pride for 

the Hispanic culture and language.  The federal programs sought to train more Hispanic 

teachers.  Because of the efforts of Senator Yarborough and others, the 1968 Bilingual 

Education Act passed, giving birth to the Bilingual Educational Movement.  With the 

passing of the 1968 Title VII-Bilingual Education Act, which was a provision of the 

Elementary and Secondary Education Act of 1965, Congress authorized funding for 

bilingual programs in school districts.  School districts were encouraged by Title VII to 

develop bilingual educational programs.  By 1968, fourteen States had enacted statutes on 

behalf of bilingual programs in public schools, and thirteen other States passed legislation 

that mandated these laws be initiated (Castellanos, 1983; Duignan, 2001; Education 

World, 1998; National Clearinghouse, 1986; Spring, 1996).  

In the early 1970s, the U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare 

(USDHEW) began implementing guidelines for school districts to set up bilingual 

programs nationwide.  Congress addressed the issue of bilingual education by enacting 

“The Equal Educational Opportunities Act of 1974” (EEOA).  The EEOA of 1974 stated 

in part that, “No state shall deny equal educational opportunity to an individual because 

of his or her race, color, sex, or national origin” (Castellanos, 1983; English for the 

Children, 1998; ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998).  The USDHEW 

interpreted the law to mean bilingual programs were required for all children who were 

from homes where English was not their primary language.  Critics noted that even a 

81

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

child who spoke perfect English might be required to take bilingual classes if their 

parents preferred to speak Spanish or Chinese at home (Duignan, 2001, English for the 

Children, 1998; Legge, 1998; Unz, 2002).  

At the same time, there were complicated court decisions concerning how to 

educate LEP students.  The most prominent was Supreme Court case Lau v. Nichols 

(1974) which required school districts to provide special language aid to students from 

homes in which English was not spoken.  The ruling found that school programs for LEP 

students conducted exclusively in English were denying students equal access to a 

meaningful education.  The Court mandated that school districts with LEP students had a 

legal and moral responsibility to help LEP students overcome their language barriers in a 

meaningful way; however, the Court never mandated bilingual education an absolute 

requirement.  Some have compared the significance of the ruling in Lau v. Nichols to that 

of Brown v. Board of Education, which ended forced segregation in public schools.  Lau 

v. Nichols gave some recourse from discrimination to students who spoke languages other 

than English (Castellanos, 1983; Duigan, 2001; English for the Children, 1998; 

ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998; Spring, 1996). 

The Supreme Court, in Guadalupe v. Temple (1978), further interpreted the 

decisions pertaining to language assistance and explicitly stated that “bilingual 

education” was not required under the U.S. Constitution or the 1964 Civil Rights Act. 

The Court declared that providing extra support in English was adequately meeting 

school districts' obligations as satisfying the requirements of Lau v. Nichols (English for 

82

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

the Children, 1998; ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998). 

Then, in the 1980s, the Bilingual Movement came under fire once more with the 

passing of Castaneda v Pickard (1981).  Based on this court case, Congress ruled that 

States and school districts servicing LEP students were to meet and address the following 

four substantial mandates.  They must state how they will address the language barriers of 

their LEP population and provide information on how a school is pursuing a sound 

educational program grounded in theory recognized by some experts.  States and school 

districts must explain how programs and practices actually used by schools are being 

effectively implemented, and based upon the educational theory adopted by the school. 

Finally, they must address how the programs produce results indicating that the language 

barriers confronting students are actually being overcome (English for the Children, 

1998; ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998).

In 1985, the Secretary of Education, William Bennett, publicly expressed his 

concerns regarding the failures of bilingual education.  He stated that LEP students in 

bilingual educational programs were educated exclusively in their native languages to the 

detriment of English, thus providing fuel to the "English-only movement.”  The 

movement for making English the official language in the United States was presented by 

Senator Hayakawa (Republican of California) in 1981; however, it was never ratified into 

law.  In 1986, President Reagan’s administration increased political activities with the 

National Association of Bilingual Education, thus quieting down the “English-only 

movement.”  However, by the late 1980s, fourteen States passed English as the official 

83

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

language legislation (Crawford, 1997; English for the Children, 1998; ELLKBase, 2002, 

2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998; Spring, 1996).  

In 1998, nearly 30 years after the passing of the Bilingual Education Act along 

with an explosion of mass immigration, the Bilingual Movement was negatively affected 

when California voters passed the Unz Initiative with a majority (60%) of the vote.  This 

initiative ended Transitional Bilingual Education (TBE) programs and mandated that LEP 

students be taught in English in California.  This again set precedence in the English-only 

movement and shocked supporters of the Bilingual Movement nationwide.  California 

housed more that half of the national LEP population, and Proposition 227 forced school 

districts and educators there to adopt English-only programs for their LEP students 

(English for Children, 1998).   

Today, proponents of bilingual education are seeking court actions to stop the 

English-only legislation.  In 1998, bilingual proponents filed a lawsuit in California to 

stop the English-only laws, such as the Unz Initiative.  In the Courts’ decision, Judge 

Legge (1998) referenced Castaneda v. Pickard (1981) and reiterated that states and 

districts are not mandated to implement bilingual programs.  Judge Legge (1998) cited 

the fact that Congress, under the EEOA 1974, intended to leave state and local 

educational authorities a substantial amount of freedom in choosing the programs they 

desire while meeting their obligations.  Judge Legge (1998) outlined specifics and stated, 

“This Act orders states and educational agencies to take appropriate action to overcome 

language barriers that impede equal participation by its students in its instructional 

84

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

programs” (p. 7).  This Act does not mention nor mandate any language assistance 

program requirements.  

The constitutions of some states also clarify these previous court rulings.  The 

Wisconsin Constitution (Article X.3) affirms that all Wisconsin students have the 

fundamental right to an equal opportunity for a sound basic education, which is defined 

as “one that will equip students for their roles as citizens and enable them to succeed 

economically and personally" (Vincent v. Voight, The Legal Responsibilities, 2001, p. 9).  

The EEOA allows school districts officials freedom to adopt any approach to educating 

LEP students, provided they take “appropriate action” to ensure their students have equal 

access to the curriculum.  The program implemented must be based on “sound 

educational theory," staffed with adequate personnel, and evaluated for effectiveness in 

overcoming the students' language barriers.  Failure to comply with the Wisconsin 

Constitution is a violation of the LEP students’ civil rights (The Focus, 2002).

The Bilingual Movement has faced major setbacks by the recent successes of the 

English-only movement.  However, bilingual programs continue to be in practice in states 

where no English-only laws have been passed.  Faithful supporters contend that 

instruction in more than one language benefits the students, the teachers, and the 

community (Hakuta, 2002).   

      

85

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Program Effectiveness

Some researchers (Hakuta, 2001; Thomas & Collier, 2001) have found that when 

implemented correctly, bilingual instruction can be successful and can produce greater 

academic achievement.  Still others (Hakuta, 2001; Thomas & Collier, 2001) argue that 

after nearly 30 years of bilingual education in the U.S., Hispanic students have remained 

in the lowest scoring group of any ethnic group on standardized assessments.  Hispanics 

also have the highest average national dropout rate (40%) (Netkin, 1997).  Schools with 

large numbers of poor, immigrant, or migrant children have higher turnover rates of 

transient LEP students.  This target population is often transient, and its attrition rate is 

high.  The high attrition rate is because LEP students are not housed in their bilingual 

programs for their entire academic careers (Friedlander, 1991).  In addition to switching 

programs, students who jump from school to school find it hard to keep up.  Research 

(Viadero, 2000) has also shown that instruction slows for all students in schools with high 

rates of turnover.  

In a San Francisco study, in which over fifty effective bilingual classrooms were 

evaluated and observed, researchers arrived at some universal effective characteristics of 

bilingual programs.  These universal characteristics included the following: 1) teachers 

gave students clear expectations and identified their expectations for completing a task; 

2) teachers used a sense of efficacy; and 3) the teachers used two languages, and 60% of 

the instruction time was in English, while the remaining time was in the native language 

86

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

of the LEP students.  Teachers have a strong sense of efficacy when they believe that they 

can affect the learning of their students.  Building efficacy can help teachers create 

an environment in which change and improvement can flourish (ELLKBase, 2002, 2001; 

Howard, 1998; NCREL, 2002).    

Often, LEP parents are not given a choice in the placement of their child.  Simply 

put, some rural and smaller districts cannot afford to create and implement bilingual 

programs and hire bilingual teachers who are qualified to teach various languages.  With 

the vast number of languages represented in the U.S., the type of bilingual programs 

available will all too often depend on how many students speak the language and the 

feasibility of hiring support personnel.  Some schools districts and/or schools have 20 or 

more different languages.  It is clearly not feasible for School Districts to be required to 

offer over 120 different bilingual programs, nor is it logical for a smaller district to hire a 

bilingual teacher for just a few students (Crawford, 1997; Legge, 1998).  Like bilingual 

educational programs, the success of alternative English programs also depends on 

resources, availability of qualified ESL teachers, and feasibility.  School districts are 

opting for ESL programs because it is very costly to hire the support personnel required 

for instruction in so many different languages.  Teachers trained in ESL are able to 

provide specialized English instruction for the LEP students whose native tongue is any 

language.  

87

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

It is likely that most LEP parents want their children to participate and learn 

English as quickly as possible.  Many people believe that by educating LEP students in 

English, one is providing an education that fosters and promotes an equitable chance at 

economic opportunity in the future (Education World, 1998).  LEP parents, particularly 

Hispanic parents, are eager to have their children fully participate in society by learning 

English.  For the parents who do want their children to learn English as quickly as 

possible, there are alternatives to placing their children in a bilingual educational program 

(Ayala & Mendoza, 1999; English for the Children, 1998; Netkin, 1997).  A study 

conducted by the American Institutes for Research in Palo Alto, California (1977-1978) 

revealed that bilingual students' scores in reading and math were not significantly higher 

than students in English-only programs.  Participation in these programs did not dictate a 

change in academic attitude or increased participation in school related activities (Castro, 

1980).  In 1998, the California Association for Bilingual Education (CABE) conceded, 

“perhaps 10 percent or fewer of the state’s (California) bilingual programs are well 

implemented” (p. 2).  CABE also cited that a shortage of bilingual teachers is a main 

factor in programs failing (Rodriguez, 1998).  Bilingual proponents are quick to offer 

justifications for these failures, placing blame on various factors other than the program 

itself.  

“The federal government pushes 3 out of 4 dollars to transitional bilingual 

programs … The reason you have schools continuing to use failing bilingual educational 

programs is that they receive federal funds for doing so" (Zehr, 2001, December, p. 2). 

According to Unz, the failure of bilingual educational programs is due not to the theory, 

88

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

but to the practice.  The theory behind bilingual education is sound, but lack of 

administration, parental, and community support hinders the program's success 

(Rodriguez, 1998; Unz, 2001).  

Lack of resources also contributes to the failure of bilingual programs.  There are 

considerable socioeconomic elements plaguing many LEP students, which may impede 

their language development and cause them to drop out of school.  

Minority   children   have   less   access   to   good   preschool   and   day-care 
programs.   The New York City-based College Board notes that in 1996 
only 63 percent of African American parents with young children enrolled 
them in preschool.  The figure was only 36 percent for Hispanic parents. 
(Viadero, 2000, p. 30) 

Consider the following: LEP families represent about 60% of all high school dropouts 

having incomes of less than $15,000 annually; many LEP students drop out to support 

their families (Sosa, 1990).  Three quarters of immigrants are from lower socioeconomic 

strata, and live in poor, urban neighborhoods (Crawford, 1997; Hakuta, 2001).  “Poverty 

is a big contributing factor to Latinos' academic deficiency” (Netkin, 1997, p. 2).  Often 

LEP students lack parental language support: 28% of LEP students live in homes where 

no one over fourteen speaks English well (Crawford, 1997).  Many LEP students are 

living in neighborhoods where their native language is the spoken language.  Numerous 

students speak English only at schools and have no access to books in English (Hakuta, 

2001; Netkin, 19971). 

In Savage Inequalities, Jonathan Kozol (1991) discussed the atrocities of many 

schools in urban areas and linked these conditions to school spending per pupil ratio and 

89

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

the quality of education available.  Kozol found links between students' educational 

achievement and their socioeconomic class.  Kozol discovered that schools in minority-

majority areas were at the bottom of the education and socioeconomic scale because the 

communities were full of families at or below the poverty level.  Out of the 550 

sophomore students enrolled at Woodrow Wilson High School, in Camden, New Jersey 

200 were expected to graduate from the twelfth grade.  Kozol continued his illustration 

by describing the dismal facility conditions of the auditorium; the ceiling had an 

enormous hole.  While on the other hand, wealthy Caucasian students attend nearby 

Bronx High School of Science where the educational conditions are excellent and most of 

the students attend college prep courses.  

Along with buildings that should have been condemned years ago, Kozol 

discovered many tools (such as textbooks and lab equipment), amenities (such as heating, 

and air conditioning) and all sorts of supplies (such as toilet paper) lacking in poor urban 

area schools.  Another aspect affecting poor urban schools Kozol depicts is the lack well-

educated and enthusiastic teachers.  The officials of these schools cannot afford to hire 

the highly motivated teachers, and many settle for mediocre or second-rate teachers. 

Kozol further commented that "to a real degree, what is considered 'adequate' or 

'necessary' or 'sufficient' for the poor … is determined by the rich or relatively rich … in 

accord with their opinion of what children of the poor are fit to become, and what their 

social role should be"(p. 216).  Many of the student's teachers that were spoken of in this 

book were part-time subs or permanent subs who did not want to teach and to add to that 

had no idea of what to do or how to teach subjects. 

90

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

While many professionals in the field agree that objections to bilingual education 

are warranted, research findings on the effectiveness of programs continues to remain in 

debate; this debate will continue as long as the achievement gap of LEP students persist. 

Results of longitudinal language studies are beginning to surface demonstrating what 

works with language assistance programs.  Regardless of the data surfacing, people from 

each side of the issue can manipulate data gathered from test scores and surveys to 

benefit their cause   Most of the experts have reached the consensus that they should put 

aside their theoretical differences and focus on what works with language assistance 

programs.  Bilingual proponents and English-only advocates have agreed that having a 

multitude of language programs is the best avenue in order to educate all LEP students 

There is arguably a core group of components that language assistance programs require 

in order to be successful; these core components will be explored next (August, 1994; 

ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998; Nevin, 1993; Short, 1999; Thomas & 

Collier, 2001).

Effective Program Components

Linguistic experts have produced a list of specific effective components that any 

language assistance program must have in order to meet the needs of LEP students.  The 

ideal solution may be a mixture of highly effective program components including the 

following (August, 1994; ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998; Nevin, 1993; 

Short, 1999; Thomas & Collier, 2001):

91

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

 

1) Strong leadership; 

2) High standards; 

3) Entrance and Exit Procedures; 

4) Authentic assessments; 

4) Qualified and Credentialed Staff; 

5) Staff development; and 

6) Parental component and community support.

Strong Leadership

Researchers and educators have long agreed that school administration officials 

are key members of the leadership team, enabling and mandating the development of 

language policies and program practices, which nourish the success of LEP students 

(Effective Instructional Strategies, 2002). 

Long-term leadership with high expectations is also important. ‘At the low 
end, districts give up and blame the environment,’ Mr. Meier said.  ‘You 
never see that in good districts.  Their attitude is, 'We can teach anybody to 
learn.’  (Johnston & Viadero, 2002, pp. 18-19) 

Public school administrators, including principals, vice principals, student counselors, 

and school psychologists, must recognize the need for effective language assistance 

programs for their LEP students.  They also must take responsibility for the success of 

their language assistance programs.  Administrators must take a leadership role in 

investigating the various language assistance programs that are available.  They must be 

92

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

aware of the unique attributes of their community, including demographics, such as 

countries of origin and languages spoken.  Administrators need to conduct research or be 

in a partnership with universities who are conducting research in field of linguistics and 

second language education.  They must address other needs that are specific to their 

community, such as the need for transportation, food, and clothing.  Finally, they must 

choose language assistance programs that complement and fulfill the needs of their LEP 

student population (Effective Instructional Strategies, 2002; ELLKBase, 2002; Johnston 

& Viadero, 2002).

High Standards

To be an effective language assistance program, it must be well organized and 

structured.  LEP students are entitled equal access to a high quality education and equity 

in resource distribution.  Setting high expectations and standards for all students may help 

to ensure educational equity.

Study after study has shown that compared to whites, a disproportionately 
small number of African American and Hispanic students take challenging 
academic courses.  The reasons vary.  Some schools rigidly track kids into 
such courses, using test scores or grades to winnow students and ensure 
that only the best [students] get in.  Other schools open tough courses to 
anyone, but minority students choose not to enroll.  In some urban schools 
with   predominantly   minority   enrollments,   there   are   only   a   handful   of 
Advanced Placement offerings—if any.  (Viadero, 2000, p. 30)

93

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

With the passing of the "No Child Left Behind Act of 2001," states and their 

public schools must commit to high standards for all students, including LEP students. 

LEP students need to be held to the same high expectations as mainstream students. 

Therefore, the academic content needs to be structured around high standards.  Content 

standards should incorporate multicultural and real-life experiences of the students.  

Creating a program with high standards helps not only LEP students, but all students to 

acquire the necessary skills needed to be successful in school.  State and district 

supplemental assessment standards and teaching standards for ESL and bilingual teachers 

must be developed.  These standards must acknowledge the importance of the language 

abilities and the inherent language limitations of LEP students.  Furthermore, they must 

provide accommodations as needed according to the language proficiency level of each 

student (ELLKBase, 2002; Wisconsin DPI, 2002).

When teachers expect less of students, they get less—and that can skew 
standards   from   school   to   school.     Data   from   the   U.S.   Department   of 
Education suggest, for example, that and A student in a big-city school is 
achieving   at   about   the   same   level   as   B   and   C   students   in   suburban 
districts.  (Johnston & Viadero, 2002, p. 18) 

In 1994, Title I of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act created mandates 

for states and school districts to create and implement high standards and expectations. 

According to the law, schools must help all students meet the new challenging standards. 

They must implement effective instructional strategies and provide an enriched and 

accelerated program of study.  The "No Child Left Behind Act of 2001" has upped the 

ante for states and public school districts by providing a structure they can employ.  It 

94

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

further mandates that schools assess the progress of all students, including LEP students. 

When LEP students are held to the same high standards as mainstream students, they may 

rise to the challenge (AFT, 2001; August, 1995; Anstrom, 1997; Hakuta, 2001; Nevin, 

1993; Short, 1999).      

Entrance and Exit Procedures

As the name suggests, entrance procedures are those that are used to place LEP 

students in specialized programs, including Newcomers programs, ESL, bilingual, 

Sheltered English Immersion.  Exit procedures are those used to transition LEP students 

from the aforementioned language assistance programs, to mainstream classrooms.  Exit 

procedures include assessing the readiness of each child to make the move out of the 

program (ELLKBase, 2002).    

Language assistance programs must have entrance and exit procedures in place 

that must be followed by district personnel.  Clearly stated expectations and criteria need 

to address how a child is identified as an LEP student.  Further, these criteria must assure 

the appropriate placement in language assistance programs.  Usually, if the student were 

identified as a non-English speaker based on the home language survey, they would next 

be required to take an administered language assessment.  These assessments identify 

their level of English and/or native proficiency level.  To accurately identify and quantify 

the LEP student’s individual needs, assessments should be conducted in English as well 

as the home language of the child.  The tests most often used for identification are the 

95

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Language Assessment Scale (LAS) or the Idea Proficiency Test (IPT).  These tests assess 

oral, reading, and writing abilities.  Program information should also be available to the 

LEP student’s family, in their native language, if possible.  Interpreters should also be 

made available to communicate with the LEP student and family (ELLKBase, 2002; 

Wisconsin DPI, 2002).

Programs fail when they do not have effective exit procedures in place and, 

consequently, students are removed from the LEP program prematurely.  Experts agree 

and research has shown that oral proficiency in English can be obtained in less than 2 

years.  However, academic English, which is more complex and is required for course 

content beyond a certain level, cannot be attained by most LEP students in less than 4 to 

5 years, unless there are other exceptional conditions present.  Prescribing strict time 

limits is thus setting students up for failure, and contributing to the achievement gap.  If 

LEP students receive only a foundation in English, they will fall behind their 

monolingual (English–only) peers in reading, writing, and in other academic content 

areas at some point.  This creates a "floundering effect" and ultimately puts LEP students 

at risk of being placed in remedial academic programs, or even worse, dropping out of 

school (AFT, 2001; Anstrom, 1997; August, 1995; Crawford, 1997; Duignan, 2000; 

Legge, 1998; Nevin, 1993; Short, 1999; Thomas & Collier, 2001). 

96

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Authentic Assessments

There are there alternative ways in which educators can measure their LEP 

students’ knowledge, without subjecting their students to failure.  Many LEP students 

cannot complete or understand these standardized tests without help.  “In spite of the high 

status of tests in our society, the perception of tests as objective, scientific, and useful are 

not consistent with language minority students” (McLaughlin, 1992, p. 1).  The use of 

standardized assessments is not an effective way to measure what LEP students have 

learned due to their limited language ability and comprehension limitations.  Research in 

ESL suggests the most effective way to assess language minority students is through 

authentic or alternative assessment (Crawford, 1997; Duignan, 2000; McLaughlin, 1995). 

Authentic assessment (A.A.) is another name used for alternative assessment. 

“Authentic assessment refers to any type of evaluation that requires a student to use their 

talents to express their understanding in a way that allows the evaluator to determine how 

deep that understanding is” (Garvin, 1996, p. 1).  Authentic assessment encourages a 

student to use higher-order thinking skills by conducting some type of performance; it 

allows educators to adapt traditional methods and integrate assessments into their 

instructional approaches.  Rather than focusing on factual recall, A.A. aims to evaluate 

students’ abilities in a real world setting.  Authentic assessment allows ESL teachers to 

focus on students’ analytical skills and their ability to share what they have learned in a 

more creative fashion.  All LEP students can benefit from authentic assessment (Garvin, 

1996).

97

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Teachers should use alternative assessment when considering the learning styles, 

language proficiencies, cultural and educational backgrounds, and grade levels of their 

students.  “Alternative assessment is an ongoing process that involves the student and the 

teacher making judgments about the students’ progress in language using non-

conventional ways” (Hancock, 1994, p. 2).  It includes a variety of measurements that can 

be altered for different educational situations.  Alternative assessment is by definition 

criterion-referenced which is an authentic approach based on classroom 

activities that represent student progress towards instructional goals (Garvin, 1996; 

Hancock, 1994; Mc Laughlin, 1995). 

Because LEP students are often limited orally, authentic assessment allows them 

to express what they know in a variety of ways.  Students can demonstrate physically 

what they know.  They can be asked to perform hands-on types of activities, act out 

specific vocabulary, or give non-verbal signs to specific “yes or no” questions.  When 

working cooperatively, LEP students can demonstrate their oral skills and develop the 

language skills that are necessary for development.  ESL teachers can assess their 

students on how their students have developed in a similar manner.  Through authentic 

assessment, teachers can integrate their assessments into various classroom activities; 

authentic assessment is best when it is intrinsically linked to the goals of the programs 

and objectives of the teacher (Garvin, 1996; Hancock, 1994; Mc Laughlin, 1995).   

Performance assessment is an authentic assessment that is designed by the 

teacher.  Performance assessments assess a specific skill and/or competency in relation to 

an agreed upon standard.  Often the performance assessment reflects a specific task and 

98

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

requires the rater to judge whether the student accomplished the activity that he or she 

was asked to perform.  A rubric is usually used to establish a performance scale expected 

by the student.  In some cases, students are required to work cooperatively, and they must 

apply their skills and concepts to a specific problem or task.  Some teachers may require 

students to perform a short investigation to assess the skills they have mastered.  This is 

often seen in mathematics and in writing (Epstein, 2000; Garvin 1996; Hancock, 1994; 

Miles, 1991; Pearson Education Development Group, 2000; Wiggins, 1990).  

Authentic assessments also come in the form of open-ended questions. 

Depending on the language level of the LEP student, he/she may respond by any means 

possible to the posed question.  They can respond orally, by written communication, by 

drawing, or by other means.  Answers may be brief; a simple as "yes" or "no" may be 

appropriate in some cases (Epstein, 2000; Garvin 1996; Hancock, 1994; Miles, 1991; 

Pearson Education Developmental Group, 2000; Wiggins, 1990).

The most popular method of A. A. used is known as a "portfolio.”  Portfolio 

assessments can be implemented at any developmental stage.  They are an ongoing 

assessment involving the student and the teacher selecting numerous work samples or 

artifacts.  The primary purpose is to show the progress made by the LEP student. 

“Portfolios allow teachers to see the student as an individual, each with his or her own 

unique set of characteristics, needs and strengths" (Epstein, 2000, p. 1).  Portfolios may 

include the teacher's observations of the student in the classroom interacting with his/her 

peers.  The teacher follows predetermined checklists in the observation.  They may also 

include journal entries and writing samples of the students.  The language assistance 

99

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

teacher can include the student speaking and reading, recorded over a specific time to 

show growth and development of their language skills.  Students can place artwork, 

diagrams, charts, and graphs inside the portfolio.  Reports and the student's notes may 

also be placed in portfolio.  Portfolio artifacts should be accompanied by the teacher's and 

the student's personal reflections, answering the question, "Why was this artifact chosen 

to be part of the portfolio?"  Performance based assessment and portfolios may be used as 

documentation when considering the re-designation of a student from LEP to Fluent 

English Proficiency (FEP).  “Performance assessment and portfolios are typically seen as 

sources of teacher and student empowerment because control over assessment shifts from 

the administrators to those linked most closely to the instruction” (Epstein, 2000; Garvin 

1996; Hancock, 1994; Pearson Education Development Group, 2000; Valdez & O'Malley, 

1992, p. 2).

Scoring is also a necessary part of assessment.  Teachers should establish criteria 

for scoring according to developmental levels of English: Non-English Proficiency, 

Limited English Proficiency and Fluent English Proficiency.  The levels are used for the 

original identification and placement of students into the program.  The scoring needs to 

be holistic and focusing on students’ ability and effort.  “Holistic scoring procedures 

evaluate performance as a whole rather than by its separate linguistic or grammatical 

features” (Valdez & O' Malley, 1992, p. 5).  A rubric may also be developed to determine 

learning outcomes.  They should be specific and kept short.  Every rubric should focus on 

a specific skill and only evaluate certain, identified measurable criteria.  The rubric may 

100

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

focus on how a student develop and express their learning.  The rubric may be a numeric 

scale ranging from 1- 5 (Pickett, 1999). 

Implementing A. A. allows language assistance teachers a wider range of 

evidence to support whether or not their students are meeting their academic goals and 

objectives.  Language assistance teachers who use meaningful authentic assessments will 

hold high academic expectations for all of their LEP students.  Using authentic 

assessment, language assistance teachers are demanding academic excellence from their 

LEP students.  To reach the ultimate language goal of fluency and mainstreaming, 

teachers must be able to use alternative means of assessments and instruction, so their 

students can have a creative manner in which to display what they have learned.  Using 

A. A. allows teachers to meet the individual needs of their language students and value 

their diversity.  When States, school districts and teachers fail to accommodate the 

assessment needs of their LEP students, they are hindering their students’ progress, thus 

giving their LEP students with an ineffective education, resulting in failure, low self-

esteem and halting of learning.  Alternative assessment provides an effective way to 

improve instruction and learning, which in the end will promote lifelong learning. 

Qualified and Credentialed Staff

School Districts must make a conscientious effort to hire credentialed teachers 

who are highly trained in language assistance programs, whether bilingual or ESL. 

School districts and universities are failing to meet this need for trained teachers.  States 

101

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

or districts who do not hire credentialed language assistance teachers to service bilingual 

or ESL students are in direct violation of the Equal Education Opportunities Act.  In the 

state of Wisconsin, districts are mandated to hire certified bilingual or ESL teachers.  “No 

LEP student may spend all or even a large part of their day within a self contained 

classroom where the instruction is provided by an unlicensed staff member” (Wisconsin 

DPI, The Legal Responsibilities, 2001, p. 6).  In Wisconsin, districts that do not provide 

enrollment opportunities for their LEP students into a language assistance program, 

administrators, and other certified staff must create a unified plan of service indicating 

how the school district will educate these students.  An Individual Record Plan (IRP) 

must be implemented, so that instruction is tailored to the student's unique needs 

(Wisconsin DPI, The Legal Responsibilities, 2001).  

The U. S. continues to benefit from a near constant influx of immigrants from all 

over the world; therefore, language assistance education is a growing field and a rich 

field of study for educators and positions for elementary and secondary teachers. 

Teachers can learn a great deal from the field of brain research, which is providing 

information on how people process first and second language acquisition.  Because 

research is always developing, teachers benefit from ongoing learning.  The rewards are 

great, for teachers witness and facilitate students learning English (August, 1994; 

ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Legge, 1998; Nevin, 1993; Short, 1999; Thomas & 

Collier, 2001). 

102

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Staff Development

Staff development is another critical component of an effective language 

assistance program.  In order for educators to have high expectations for their students, 

they too, must be held to the same high standards.  When teachers lack specific training 

in the needs of their student population, they tend to dilute the curriculum and simplify 

the materials and language to the essentials (The Focus, 2002).

New research indicates that children in schools with many minority and 
poor students are more likely to be taught by under qualified teachers. 
Those findings are emerging just as other studies are beginning to quantify 
the   damage   that   an   ineffective   teacher   can   do.     Research   by  William 
Sanders and his colleagues at the University of Tennessee suggest that 
three consecutive years of bad teachers can significantly hamper a child’s 
learning over the long run.  (Viadero, 2000, p. 30) 

  

LEP students’ needs are constantly changing and evolving over time, which may 

interfere with their academic progress.  Staff training opportunities allows time for 

coaching, reflection, exploration of new techniques and strategies utilized to solve 

problems that are unique to teaching LEP students.  The stress of continually adapting, 

creating, and modifying the curriculum and addressing the holistic LEP students’ needs 

tend to cause additional pressures that are also unique to language assistance teachers 

(ELLKBase, 2002). 

103

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Teachers   are   taught   to   believe   that   all   children   can   learn,   but   their 
classroom experiences sometimes convince them otherwise.  According to 
some experts and parents, veterans of teaching low-achieving minorities 
eventually   come   to   expect   less   of   these   students   than   others   and 
discourage them from taking advanced classes.  Research, however, is thin 
on whether teacher expectations create a kind of self-fulfilling prophecy 
for minority students.  (Viadero, 2000, p. 30)

 

Nevertheless, the biggest problem teachers’ face may be a simple lack of time -- time to 

gather materials, develop lesson plans, assess student performance, maintain contact with 

parents, and keep up with advances in teaching and in academic subjects (Hakuta, 1998). 

Staff development and training may help reduce the high turnover rates typical of 

language assistance teachers.  In 1998, according to the California Department of 

Education, there were only 14,965 certified bilingual teachers, and only 9,188 were in 

training at that time (Hakuta, 1998).  California determined it would need an estimate of 

20,000 bilingual teachers in order to meet the needs of its large LEP student population. 

Other states including Wisconsin lack a sufficient amount of trained ESL teachers. 

Throughout the U.S., LEP students are now are in general education classes with 

mainstreamed content teachers who are not trained in meeting their needs (Hakuta, 1998). 

Without adequate training, the needs of LEP students are inadvertently being ignored. 

This is especially true in content courses, and it leads to the students' failure and 

increased drop out rates.  Therefore, staff development should be a priority for school 

districts nationwide.  Proper allocation of resources for staff development should be a 

part of all school districts’ budget planning.  If this need is ignored, all students suffer.  If 

104

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

the need is met, all students, especially those who are LEP, will be better able to meet 

their full potential (AFT, 2001; Anstrom, 1997; August, 1995; Duran & Slavin 1996; 

ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 1998; Ortiz, 2001; Short, 1999).     

Family and Community Involvement

Family and community involvement is an added assurance of LEP students’ 

success.  Current research indicates that students’ academic success is related to 

variations in parenting.  

Anecdotal   evidence   suggests,   for   example,   that   (white)   parents   may 
interact with their young children in ways that had better support school 
success.    They  might,   for   example,   ask  children   more   questions   or  to 
justify their requests.  Moreover, as children get older … Hispanic parents 
may be less inclined to pressure them to do well in school or to push for 
their placement in advanced classes.  (Johnston & Viadero, 2002, p. 1)

Schools must find ways to reach the LEP parents early and establish avenues of 

communication.  If administrators and educators fail to communicate with their LEP 

parents, they may be hindering the success of their LEP students and the future of their 

language programs as well.  Bilingual education has played a vital role in increasing 

parental involvement.  Creating ESL classes for parents at the school site is also an 

effective way to communicate with LEP parents and to get them involved in the 

educational process (August, 1995; ELLKBase, 2002; Johnston & Viadero, 2002; Short, 

1999).

105

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

More research is needed on the extent of the impact of LEP parental involvement 

and LEP students’ success.  There appears to be no negative effect of reaching out to the 

parents.  Regular communication with parents throughout the school years may increase 

the effectiveness of language assistance programs.  Regular parent-teacher conferences, 

with interpreters on hand if necessary, will increase the communication.  Parents can also 

be informed of upcoming course content, perhaps in flyers printed in their native 

language, if feasible; this will enable parents to be better prepared to help their children 

with their assignments (August, 1995; ELLKBase, 2002; Johnston & Viadero, 2002; 

Short, 1999).

Another way to get the community involved is to enact a tutoring program 

involving older LEP and/or FEP students in the area.  If tutors can be found that speak the 

native language of the younger children, they can help the teacher to communicate with 

the younger kids.  This is especially vital when the students are new arrivals to this 

country.  It benefits the older children because they can feel a sense of pride and 

accomplishment after helping the younger students (August, 1995; ELLKBase, 2002; 

Johnston & Viadero, 2002; Short, 1999).

                

Conclusion

States, school districts, and schools have made tremendous progress in closing the 

achievement gap.  During the 1970s and 1980s, Hispanics and other LEP students made 

greater strides in narrowing the academic gap when compared to their monolingual 

106

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

counterparts.  For example, from the year 1970 to 1990, the gap between minority and 

majority groups declined by nearly half (Johnston & Viadero, 2002).  Nevertheless, 

advancement in this area is still required because the gap continues to persist.    

Various linguistic experts agree that it is time to put aside debates about the 

various language assistance programs.  For many students today, especially students who 

are poor and have limited English proficiency, both equality and excellence in education 

remain out of reach.  The reality is that U.S. schools are continuing to fail to meet the 

academic needs of LEP students.  A solitary program is not the solution because every 

state has its own set of standards and benchmarks, which vary from district to district and 

sometimes, from school to school.  The decision on how to “best” educate LEP students 

(bilingual or ESL) should be left up to the school districts.  These officials should have 

knowledge of their student population and their unique needs.  The U.S. does not have a 

national curriculum established as of yet, therefore why should states and school districts 

have a "one size fits all" national curriculum for their LEP students?  The National 

Research Council concluded after reviewing the language assistance programs of the past 

25 years, “There is little evidence to support which program is best.  The key issue is not 

finding a program that works for ALL children and localities, but finding a set program 

that works for the community of interest” (Crawford, 1997, pps. 27-28).  A "one size fits 

all" curriculum disregards the variations of the LEP student population within a 

community.  Setting conditions on which programs to teach and which programs to 

implement disregards the individual needs of LEP students such as age, maturity, 

107

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

language skills, previous home-country schooling, learning styles and other unique 

attributes (Legge, 1998). 

Poverty, while a big factor, does not account for all of the differences.  Nor 
does   family   structure.    All   other   things   being   equal,   young   children 
growing   up   in   single-parent   homes   score   just   as   high   on   preschool 
vocabulary tests as children from intact families.   (Johnston & Viadero, 
2002, p. 1) 

School districts need to listen to the needs of the community.  Texas A&M 

University researchers studied the best schools for educating minorities in their state, and 

found that solid, consistent implementation of the programs was the most important 

factor (Johnston & Viadero, 2002).  Despite the issues plaguing our LEP students, every 

school district, school, administrator, teacher, parent, and student must be held 

accountable for LEP students’ progress.  Some of the statistics are striking: 

Nearly half of New York City's teaching force in the 1997-98 school year 
had failed certification tests in math—compared with a little over a fifth of 
teachers in the surrounding suburbs and less than a quarter of the teachers 
throughout the rest of the state … From birth to high school graduation, 
the average child in New York City will see about $25,975 less spent on 
his   or   her   education   than   the   average   child   elsewhere   in   the   state, 
according to a recent report by the Council of the Great City Schools, a 
Washington-based organization of urban districts. (Johnston & Viadero, 
2002, p. 1) 

108

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

There can be no more excuses!  Everyone involved in the education of LEP 

students must do a better job at teaching these LEP students the English skills they need 

to be successful.  The federal government, States, and school districts must do a better job 

at funding districts' language assistance programs (bilingual/ESL) for all students of 

limited English.  States and school districts must continue to evaluate their language 

assistance programs for effectiveness.  If school districts can prove their LEP students are 

meeting their district and state’s grade level goals and objectives, then they should be 

allowed to maintain their programs of choice.  According to Castaneda v Pickard (1981), 

if a district’s LEP student population is not meeting the state or school district’s level of 

English language proficiency targeted projected growth, school districts will then need to 

revamp their curriculum and seek alternative programs. 

Limited English students remain "at risk."  Even a solitary LEP student should 

have equal access to a trained, certified teacher.  Schools that have just one LEP student 

are under the same obligation to provide their LEP student with a comprehensive English 

language program.  All too often, LEP students are just "pushed aside" and their 

educational needs are ignored.  Regardless of the program selected, whether bilingual or 

ESL, these students need attention.  Educators must do their part to make sure these LEP 

students’ needs are met, now, and in the future.

109

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

References

Alcala, A. (2000).  Practical assessments, research, and evaluation.  Eric Digest. 

Retrieved July 29, 2002, from http://www.ed.gov/databses/EricDigests.

Addison, A. ESL Strategies for Content Teachers.  Research Paper.  Retrieved July 29, 

2002, from  http://www.shsu.edu/~lib_jeo/anneaddisonresearch.htm.

Anstrom, K. (1997, September).  Academic Achievement for Secondary Language 

Minority Students: Standards, Measures, and Promising Practices.  Retrieved 
September 6, 2002, from National Clearinghouse for Bilingual Education: 
http://www.ncela.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/reports/acadach.htm#Overview.

August, D.,  Carlo, M., & Calderon, M. (2000). Transfer of reading skills from Spanish to 

English: A study of young learners.  Retrieved July 29, 2002, from 
http://www.cal.org/projects/obemla.html.

August, D. (1995, Fall).  For all students: Limited English proficient students and goals. 

Retrieved September 3, 2003, from 
http://http:www.ncela.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/focus/focus10.htm.

Ayala, H...  & Mendoza, M. (1999, January).  Text of Proposition 203.  In English for the 

children of Arizona.  English language education for children in public schools. 
Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4255.

Bailey, K. M., Curtis, A., & Nunan, D. (2001). Pursuing professional development: The 

self as source.  Boston, MA: Heinle & Heinle.

Bailey, K. M., Curtis, Andy.  &.  Freeman, D. (2001).  Goals-based evaluation 

Procedures: How students perceive what teachers intend.  TESOL Journal Winter, 
10
(4), 5-9.

Baker, C. (2000).  The care and education of young bilinguals: An introduction for 

professionals.  Tonawanda, NY: Multilingual Matters Ltd.

Barnhardt, S., Chamot, A., El-Dinary, P et al.  The learning strategies handbook.  White 

Plains, NY: Longman.

Becker, J. A. (2002).  Teaching language by previewing lessons.  TESOL Journal, 11(2), 

38.

110

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Boston Globe Editorial.  (2002, August 6).  Bilingual breaththrough.  Boston Globe. 

Section:  A14.  Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 
http://boston.com/dailyglobe2/218/editorials/Bilingual_breaththroughP.shtml.

Bousquet, M, Butler, Y. G., Hakuta, K., & Orr, J. E.  (2002, August 15).  What can we 

learn about the impact of Proposition 227 from Sat-9 scores?  Retrieved 
September 8, 2002, from http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Brown, J. (1998).  New ways of classroom assessment.  Alexandria, VA: TESOL.

Calderon, M., & Slavin, R. (2001).  Effective programs for Latino students.  Mahwah, 

N.J.: TEASELED.

Calderon, M., & Duran, R., Fashola, & O. S., Slavin, R. E. CRESPAR Report No. 11-

Effective programs for Latino students in elementary and middle schools 
[Program 5: Language Minority Studies].  Retrieved July 29, 2002, from 
CRESPAR: http://www.csos.jhu.edu/crespar/Reports/reports11entire.htm.

Castellanos, D. (1983).  The best of two worlds: Bilingual-bicultural education.  Trenton, 

NJ: New Jersey State Department of Education.

Castro, F. (1980, January 5). Bilingual education at a crossroad. Los Angeles Times.

Center for Applied Linguistics. CAL. Retrieved July 26, 2002, from CAL: 

http://www.cal.org/schoolservices/.

Center for Law and Education. What does it take? Title I school wide programs. 

Retrieved September 6, 2002, from http://www.cleweb.org/t1.htm.

Chamot, A. U., & O'Malley, J. The CALLA handbook: Implementing the cognitive 

academic language learning approach. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley 
Publishing Company.

Chavez, J., & Montero, R. (2001, June). Text of Colorado’s Initiative. In English for the 

Children of Colorado.  Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4255.

Costello, M. (1996). Critical issue: Providing effective schooling for students at risk. 

Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.ncrel.org/sdrs/areas/issues/students/atrisk/at600.htm.

Crawford, J. (1997). Best evidence: Research foundations of Bilingual Education Act. 

Retrieved July 29, 2002, from http://www.ncborgwu.edu.

111

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Crawford, J. (1998, Winter). Rethinking schools-Does bilingual education work? 13(2). 

Retrieved July 29, 2002, from http://

 

 

www.rethinkingschools.org/Archieves/13-

 

 

02/biside.htm

 

 

.

  

Cromwell, S. (1999, January 19). The bilingual education debate: Part 1. Education 

World. Retrieved August 22, 2002, from http://www.education-
world.com/a_curr/curr047.shtml.

Cummins, J. (1999, February 22). Research, ethics, and public discourse: The debate on 

bilingual education. Paper presented at the National Conference of the American 
Association of Higher Education.

Cummins, J., & Genzuk, M. (1991, March).  Analysis of final report longitudinal study of 

structured English immersion strategy, early- exit and late-exit transitional 
bilingual education programs for language-minority children. The California 
Association for Bilingual Education Newsletter.

Duff, P. A. (2001). Learning English for academic and occupational purposes. TESOL 

Quarterly, 35(4).

Duignan, Peter. Hoover essay. Bilingual education: A critique. Retrieved July 29, 2002, 

from, http://www.hooverstandfordedu./publications/he/22/22d.html.

Duran, R., & Slavin, R. Program 5 highlights: Effective bilingual education. Retrieved 

September 6, 2002, from http://http;//www.csos.jhu.edu/crespar/prog5hi.html.

Effective instructional practices for language minority students. MAEC. Retrieved July 

29, 2002, from http:www.maec.org/instprac.htlm.

English for the Children (1998, February). Falsehoods and facts about "English for the 

Children.” In English for the Children. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4255.

English for the Children of Arizona (2003). Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 

http://www.angelfire.com/az/english4thechildren/body.html.  

ELLKBase- The English Language Learner Knowledgebase. (2002) A framework for 

alternative language programs [Data file]. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/practitionerstips/Framework_ALP.sht
ml.

The English Plus Alternative. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 

http://ourworld.compuserve.com/homepages/JWCRAWFORD/EPIC.htm.

112

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Epstein, A. (2000). Assessment: Portfolio assessment: Checklists. Retrieved September 6, 

2002, from http://www.teachervision.com.

Educational resource Information Center (ERIC) (1998, July). Qualities of effective 

programs for immigrant adolescents with limited schooling.  Retrieved September 
5, 2003, from http://www.ed.gov/databases/Eric_Digests/ed423667.html.

Estrada, P. (2002). Patterns of instructional activity in culturally and linguistically 

diverse classrooms: Excellence, inclusion, fairness, and harmony. Retrieved 
September 5, 2002, from http://www.crede.ucsc.edu/research/tier/intro5_8.shtml.

Freeman, D., & Freeman, Y. Sheltered English instruction. Retrieved June 29, 2002, from 

ERIC Digest: http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/ed301070.html.

Friedlander, M. (Fall, 1991).  The newcomers program: Helping immigrant students 

succeed in U.S. schools. NCBE Program Information Guide Series, No. 8. 
Retrieved November 1, 2002, from http://ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/pigs/pig8.htm

 

 ;   

http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/refernces/NEWCOMERPROGRAMT
ableCo

 

 .  

Garcia, E. E. (1988, Winter). Effective schooling for language minority students (1st Ed.) 

Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.ncela.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/classics/focus/01effective.htm.

Garvin, I. (1996). Authentic-alternative assessment.  Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 

http://iteachnet.org.

Genesee, F., Gottlieb, M., Katz, A., & Malone, M. (2001). Scenarios for ESL standards-

based assessment. Alexandria,VA: TESOL.

Gentry, M. L. Promoting student achievement, and exemplary classroom practices 

through cluster grouping: A research-based alternative to heterogeneous 
elementary classrooms [Special issue]. The National Research Center on the 
Gifted and Talented.
. Retrieved August 3, 2002, from 
http://www.gifted.uconn.edu/gentry.html.

Gonzalez, J. (1979). Coming of age in bilingual education: A historical perspective. In H. 

Trueba & C. Barnett-Mizrahi (Eds.), Bilingual-multicultural education and the 
professional. Rowley, MA: Newbury House.

Hakuta, K. (2001, April 13). The education of language minority students. Paper 

presented at United States Commission on Civil Rights. Retrieved September 26, 
2002, from http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Docs/CivilRightsCommision.htm.

113

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Hakuta, K. (2002, August 22). Points on SAT-9 performance and Proposition 227. 

Retrieved September 8, 2002, from http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Hakuta, K. (2002, August 29). What can we learn about the impact of Proposition 227 

from SAT-9 Scores. Retrieved September 8, 2002, from 
http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Hakuta, K. & August, D. (1997). Improving education for all children: meeting the Needs 

of Language Minority Children. Retrieved August 6, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Aspen.html.

Hayward, E. (2002, September 5). On opening day, Schools tackle bilingual ed issue. 

Boston Herald.

Howard, E. R., & Loeb, M. I. (1998, December). In their own words: Two-way 

Immersion teachers talk about their professional experiences. Retrieved 
September 5, 2003, from ERIC Digest: 
http://www.cal.org/ericcll/intheirownwords.html.

Howard, E. R., & Sugarman, J. (2001, March). Development and maintenance of two-

way immersion programs: advice from practitioners. Retrieved September 5, 
2002, from CREDE: http://www.crede.ucsc.edu/research/11aa/pb2.shtml.

Howard, E. R., & Sugarman, J. (2001, March). Two-way immersion programs: Features 

and statistics. Retrieved September 5, 2003, from ERIC Digest: 
http://www.cal.org/ericcl/digest/0101twi.html.

IPT Testing Retrieved July 29, 2002, from http://www.ballard-

tighe.com/catalog/ipt03.htm.

Issues in U.S. language policy-bilingual education (2001).  Retrieved July, 29, 2002, 

from http://ourworld.compuserve.com/homepages/JWCRAWFORD/biling.htm.

Johnston, R. C, & Viadero, D. (2002, March 15). Unmet promise: Raising 
            minority achievement. Education Week, 19(27), 1-19.  

Kayser, H. (2000). From the heart. Retrieved July, 29, 2002, from 

http://www.bilingualtherapies.com/Dr.says/.

Katz, A., Genesee, F., Gottlieb, M., & Malone, M. (2001). Scenarios for ESL
       standards-based assessment.
 Alexandria, VA: TESOL.

114

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Kerper Mora, J. (2000, October 10). Philosophical assumptions. Comparison of 

philosophical assumptions of English-only l2 instruction versus bilingual 
education.
 Retrieved July 26, 2002, from 
http://coe.sdsu.edu/people/jmora/Prop227/AssumptionsEOvBE.htm.

Kenosha Unified School District (2002). Four-year graduation rate- Cohort analysis. 

Office of Educational Accountability. 

Ketterer, K. A.. Language immersion resources. Retrieved July 26, 2002, from 

http://www.readingonline.org/electronic/watch/watch2/html.

Kitao, K., & Kitao, S. (2002, August 29). Language testing. Retrieved August 6, 2002, 

from http://www.ling.lancs.ac.uk/staff/visitors/kenji/test.htm.

Krashen, S. (1985). Insights and Inquires. Hayward, CA: Alemany Press.

Krashen, S. (1997). Why bilingual education? Retrieved August 6, 2002, from 

http://ourworld.compuserve.com/homepages/JWCRAWFORD/bil-new.htm.

Krashen, S. (1999). Structured immersion falls short of expectations: An analysis of 

Clark. NABE.

Krashen, S. (2002, August 26). Focus on the library, not the playground [Letter to the 

editor]. Arizona Republic.

Kozol, J. (1991).  Savage inequalities.  Children in American schools. New York: 

Perennial.

Lachat, M. (1999). What policymakers and school administrators need to know about 

assessment reform for English language learners. Brown University: LAB.

Lachat, M. A. (2000). Standards, equity, and cultural diversity [Brochure]. Brown 

University: LAB.

Lam, W. (2000). L2 literacy and the design of the self: Case study of a teenager writing 

on the Internet. TESOL Quarterly, 34(3).

Language acquisition. Retrieved September 1, 2001, from 

http://earthrenewal.org/secondlang.htm.

Legge, C. (2000, June). Federal Court decision. In Decision by Judge Charles Legge: 

Refusing to delay the effective date of Proposition 227 by U.S. District Judge 
Charles A. Legge.
 San Francisco: Federal Court Decision. Retrieved September 6, 
2002, from http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID-7776.

115

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Lokon, E. (2002). Reconsidering basic ESL/EFL Terms. TESOL Journal, 11(2).

Lu, M. (1998). English-only movement: Its consequences on education of language 

minority students. Retrieved July 30, 2002, from 
http://www.ed.gov/databses/EricDigests.

McLaughlin, B. (1992).  Myths and misconceptions about second language learning: 

What Every Teacher needs to Unlearn. Retrieved August 22, 2002, from 
http://www.bilingualprek.org/dl/myths.pdf.

McQuillian, J. (1998, 22 August,).Response: Los Angeles Times. Is 99% failure a 

success?  Orange Unified's English immersion program [Letter to the editor]. 
California State University, Fullerton.

Maguire, M. H., & Graves, B. (2001). Speaking personalities in primary school children 

L2 writing. TESOL Quarterly, 35(4).

Mexican American Legal Defense and Educational Fund.- MALDEF (1997, September). 

Preliminary section-by-section of analysis of Unz initiative. Retrieved September 
6, 2002, from One Nation: http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=5112.

Mexican American Legal Defense and Educational Fund MALDEF. (1997, November). 

Questions and answers on the Unz initiative. In MALDEF. Retrieved September 6, 
2003, from http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=511155.

Miles, T. (1991). Criteria for complex performance-based assessments. Retrieved 

September 6, 2003, from http://vmsgophercua.edu.

Milloy, M. (2002, September). To learn a language. NEA Today, 22.  

National Clearinghouse for Bilingual Education. (1986, March). The status of state 

statutes for language minority students. Forum, pps. 1-3.

NeilESL@aol.com. (2002, September 5). Email: The UNZ Initiative. Message posted to 

electronic mailing list, archived at http://NeilESL@aol.com.

Netkin, H. (1998, May). An assessment of Bilingual Education. In Letter. Retrieved 

September 6, 2002, from http://onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4032.

Nevin, A., Neciichea, J., & Cline, Z. Using data-based instruction to improve the learning 

outcomes of students who are difficult to teach. CSUSM College of Education. 
Retrieved July 29, 2003, from http://www.csusm.edu/thousand/necochea.html.

Nunan, D. (2001). English as a global language. TESOL Quarterly, 35(4).

116

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

No Child Left Behind Act of 2001 Title I sec. 1111(b)(3)(C)(x).

North Central Regional Educational Laboratory- NCREL. (2002). Retrieved March 23, 

2003, from http://www.ncrel.org/sdrs/areas/issues/educatrs/leadrshp/le5effic.htm.

One Nation. (2001, August). STAR: Test scores and gains for elementary grades in 

selected districts, 1998-2000. In English for the Children. Retrieved September 6, 
2002, from http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=5101.

Ortiz, A. (2001, December). English language learners with special needs: Effective 

instructional strategies. ERIC Digest. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from ERIC 
Digest: http://www.cal.org/ericcll/gisgest/0108ortiz.html.

Pearson Education Development Group. Authentic assessment overview.  Retrieved 

September 6, 2003, from http://www.teachervison.com.

Pickett, N. (1999). Guidelines for rubric development. Retrieved September 6, 2003, 

from http://edweb.sdsu.edu.

Porter, R., & Rossell, C., & Tamayo, L. (2002, June). An initiative petition for a law: An 

act relative to the teaching of English in public schools. In English for the 
Children of Massachusetts.
 English for the Children of Massachusetts. Retrieved 
September 6, 2002, from http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4257.

Rennie, J. (1993, September). ESL and Bilingual program models. Retrieved September 

5, 2003, from Eric Digest: http://http;//www.cal.org/ericcll/digest/rennie01.html.

Reyhner, J., & Stiles, D. (1997). Teaching indigenous languages. In Four Successful 

Indigenous Language Programs (Ch. 21). Retrieved August 6, 2002, from 
http://jan.ucc.nau.edu/~jar/TIL_21.html.

Ruelas, R. (2002, August 26). Adios to Spanish got lost in the translation. Arizona 

Republic The School News, L. (2002, August). Implementing "No Child Left 
Behind" With Adequate Yearly Progress Provisions, 7(1), 1-2.

Snow, C., & Unz, R. (2001, October 14). Bilingual education: A necessary help or a 

failed hindrance? Paper presented at Harvard Educational Forum. Retrieved 
September 6, 2003, from http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4250.

Snow, M. A. (2000). Implementing the ESL standards for Pre-K-12 students through 

teacher education. Alexandria,VA: TESOL.

Sociology Project 338. Retrieved from: 

http://www.princeton.edu/~sociolog/syllabi/centeno_teachers.html.

117

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Sosa, A. (1990). Making education work  for Mexican-Americans: Promising 

Community. Retrieved September 12, 2002, from 
http://npin.org/library/pre1998/n00316/n00316.html.

Spring, J. (1996). American education (7th Ed.) New York: Mc Graw-Hill.

Tannenbaum, J. (1996) Practical ideas on alternative assessment for ESL students. Eric 

Digest. Retrieved September 12, 2002, from 
http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/.

Tench, M. (2002, September 5). School panel eyes bilingual education. Boston Globe 

Section: B5.

Teachers of English to Students of Other Languages- TESOL. (2001, July 18). Summary 

of Improving America's Schools Act of 1994 (Elementary and Secondary 
Education Act). TESOL. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.tesol.org/advocacy/articles/00-5-esea.html.

Thomas, W. P., & Collier, V. P. (2001). A national study of school effectiveness for 

language minority students' long-term academic achievement. Retrieved 
September 5, 2002, from http://www.crede.ucsc.edu/research.

Total number of English language learners in California grades 2-11 [Data file]. 

Available from http://star.cde.ca.gov/

 

 .  

U.S. Department of Education Office of Civil Rights: Programs for English language 

learners. Part IV: Glossary of Terms [Data file]. Online: U.S. Department of 
Education Office of Civil Rights. Available from 
http://www.ed.gov/offices/OCR/ELL/glossary.html.

Unz, R. (2002). Lau v. "Lau". UnzColumn. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 

http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=7956.

Vaishnav, A. (2002, September 4). Seeking the right course on bilingual education despite 

criticism, Lawrence schools try a different approach. Boston Globe.

Valdez, L. & O’Malley, M. (1992). Performance and portfolio assessment for language 

minority students.  Retrieved September 12, 2002, from 
http://www.ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs.

Vargas, M.  (2001). Learning English in structured English immersion programs. 

Retrieved July 26, 2002, from 
http://www.bilingualeducation.org/2000_2_33_01.htm.

118

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Vasquez., J. A. (1996, December). Instructional strategies for teachers of limited-

English-proficient students: A Bibliography. Retrieved July 28, 2002, from 
http://www.ncbe.we.edu/miscpubs/lists/strats.htm.

Viadero, D. (2000, May). Bridging the gap. Teacher Magazine, 11(8).

Wiggins, G. (1990). The case for authentic assessment. Retrieved July 28, 2002, from 

http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/.

Wilson-Allam, D. (2001, December). The professional development committee: Waking 

up to the needs of English language learners. TESOL Matters, 12(1).

The Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction. (2002). Best practices considerations 

when serving limited-English Proficient (LEP) students in K-12 public schools. 
Retrieved July 28, 2000, from 
http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/dpi/dlsea/equity/biling.html.

The Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction. (2002). Legal responsibilities when 

serving limited-English -proficient (LEP) students in K-12 public schools. 
Retrieved December 21, 2002, from 
http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/dpi/dlsea/equity/biling.html.

Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction.  (2002) Alternative assessment. Retrieved 

July 28, 2002, from http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/.

Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction. (2002) Graduation rates. Retrieved on 

January 19, 2003, from http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/een/sip1d.html. 

Zehr, M. A. (2001, February) Bush plans alter bilingual education. Education Week

Retrieved September 5, 2002, from http://www.edweek.org .

Zehr, M. A. (2001, April) Immigration spawns bills similar to Proposition 227. Education 

Week. Retrieved September 5, 2002, from http://www.edweek.org. 

Zehr, M. A. (2001, June) ESL students pose a special challenge for rural schools. 

Education Week. Retrieved September 5, 2002, from http://www.edweek.org.

Zehr, M. (2001, September). English-language learners post improved Calif. test scores. 

Education Week. Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 
http://www.edweek.org/ew/newstory.cfm?slug=011ep.h21.

Zehr, M. (2001, December).  California's English-fluency numbers help fuel debate. 

Education Week.  Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 
http://edweek.org/ew/newstory.cfm?slug=14biling.h21.

119

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

QUESTION 4

Standardized tests are the conventional criteria for measuring student learning.  Evaluate the 
concept that standardized tests are the most effective and accurate measurements for LEP 
learners versus alternative assessments.

The trend toward basing large scale assessments on performance standards challenges practices 
… have dominated public schools for more than a half century
 (Mary Ann Lachat, 1999).

Standardized assessments (or standardized tests) were designed by test publishers to give 

a common measure of students’ performances; these tests measure a broad range of students’ 

abilities or skills, which are considered important when determining students’ success in school. 

They can measure verbal ability, mechanical ability, creativity, clerical ability, and/or abstract 

reasoning.  Ideally, the results are utilized to help teachers plan instruction, develop programs, 

and tailor instruction that suit students' achievement levels in each subject area, including 

reading, math, language skills, spelling, and science (Lachat, 1999).  This comprehensive paper 

discusses the implementation of standardized assessments, such as high-stakes testing, during the 

accountability movement in education in three sections in order to determine if they are the most 

effective and accurate measurements for LEP learners.  First, standardized testing, along with its 

advantages and limitations will be examined.  Second, there is a detailed look at language level 

abilities of LEP students.  Finally, this paper will address authentic (or alternative) assessments 

as an effective way to measure limited English proficient (LEP) students’ academic achievement. 

Limited English Proficient (LEP) is the legal term used to identify students, who were not 

born in the United States, or whose native language is not English, and those students who 

cannot participate effectively in regular classrooms because they lack fluency in spoken and 

written English (Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  LEP is the term recognized by the 

120

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Office of Civil Rights (OCR), and the term used throughout this comprehensive paper to refer to 

such students (Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  Non English Proficient (NEP) is the legal 

term used to identify students who are recent arrivals (immigrant-status) and have been in the 

United States less than one year.  NEP is the term recognized by the Office of Civil Rights 

(OCR), and the term used throughout this comprehensive paper to refer to such students 

(Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  Bilingual is a generalized term that refers to all 

programs other than English as a Second Language (ESL).  In this paper, the term bilingual 

includes all Language Assistance Programs (LAP) offered within the Kenosha Unified School 

District, and unless otherwise stated, it includes the following programs: Dual Immersion, 

Transitional Bilingual Education (TBE), English as a Second Language (ESL), and Sheltered 

English Immersion (SEI).  

Standardized Assessments

Throughout educational history, standardized assessments have been popular instruments 

to measure accountability and reform.  They lead to changes in curriculum and changes in 

teaching that have traditionally been difficult to legislate.

  

Over the past 15 years, legislators 

have created educational reform, creating the standards-based reform movement.  Legislators 

developed Goals 2000: Educate America Act, the 1994 Reauthorization of the Elementary and 

Secondary Education Act (Improving America’s Schools Act, 1994), and now the No Child Left 

Behind Act of 2001.  These Acts mandated states to adopt challenging academic content 

121

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

standards, develop assessments, and align the assessments with their standards (ELLKBase 

2002; Testing Resource, OCR, 2000).  

By the year 2000, every state, except Iowa, implemented at least one form of 

standardized assessment.  The majority of Iowa school districts voluntarily administered the 

Iowa Tests of Basic Skills, which is a standardized assessment.  President George W. Bush made 

educational accountability part of his agenda, as he aimed to close the achievement gap, with the 

"No Child Left Behind Act" of 2001.  Congress also passed a Revised Version of the Elementary 

and Secondary Education Act (ESEA).

Under Title I of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act, states are 
now required to develop content standards, performance standards, and 
assessment systems that measure the progress that schools and districts are 
making in educating students to the standards established by the state.  If 
educators and policy-makers consider using the same test for school or 
district   accountability   purposes   and   for   individual   student   high-stakes 
purposes, they need to ensure that the test score inferences are valid and 
reliable for each  particular  use for which  the test  is being considered. 
(Testing Resource, OCR, 2000, pp. 13-14)

Today, in order for teachers to raise the academic achievement of their students, 

numerous states have created rigorous academic standards for their students at all grade levels. 

To measure whether or not students were meeting these standards, states have created and 

implemented a system of accountability that is measured through standardized assessments. 

States and school districts are now using standardized assessments to make high-stakes decisions 

regarding their student body that not only will affect their students’ ability to move on to the next 

grade level, they will also be used to determine whether or not their students will be able to 

graduate from high school.  These types of tests are called high-stakes testing because of the 

122

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

decisions they influence can lead to serious consequences for the students and for the schools. 

Some examples of high-stakes decisions include the following: student placement in gifted and 

talented programs; student placement in programs for students with limited English proficiency; 

determinations of disability and eligibility to receive special education services; student 

promotion from one grade level to another; graduation from high school and diploma awards; 

and scholarship awards.  Based on students’ test scores, students may be retained, enrolled in 

summer school or remedial classes, or be denied access to a preferred high school or college.  In 

some cases, teachers’ and principals’ salaries also rise and fall based on their students’ scores.  It 

is important to note that high-stakes testing do not include teacher created exams or quizzes that 

are used for individual classroom purposes (Hass, 2002; Hernandez, 2002; Lachat, 1999).

Advantages and Limitations of Standardized Assessments

Standardized assessments serve many practical uses in schools (Bagin & Rudner, 1996). 

The best utilization of standardized assessments include the following: evaluating programs, 

reporting students' progress, diagnosing students' strengths and weaknesses, selecting students 

for special programs, placing students into special groups, and measuring students’ achievement. 

Because a large number of students throughout the U.S. take the same test within a given 

timeframe, results can be analyzed to help educators determine how students in a given class, 

school, or school system perform in relation to other students who take the same test (Bagin & 

Rudner,1996).  In the article Standardized Testing in Schools, Robert Linn (2000) cited four 

reasons for the popularity of standardized tests: 1) standardized tests are relatively inexpensive; 

123

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

2) they can be administered relatively quickly; 3) their results are visible; and 4) first year results 

tend to increase, indicating schools are improving. 

Standardized tests have provided one way for states and school districts to judge whether 

students are meeting their rigorous standards and whether their schools are performing; yet, they 

have limitations.  A standardized assessment does not adequately gauge an individual student's 

knowledge.  “The complexity of a child’s knowledge cannot simply be captured by a single test” 

(Patten, 2000, p. 1).  In terms of LEP students, standardized assessments’ results neither 

demonstrate nor take into account all of the human and contextual factors which affect a 

student’s English language proficiency and the student’s ability to handle a standardized test 

(Fontana, 2002).  Traditional standardized assessments hinder educational opportunities for 

several reasons: 

1. They are culturally biased; 

2. they inadequately measure what LEP students actually know; and 

3. they are often used for placement purposes (Lachat, 1999).  

Standardized assessments are limited in what they can measure.  Standardized 

assessments are quantitative measurements, which can determine when students have achieved 

or failed a task.  They can provide national ranking, percentiles, and allow researchers to conduct 

comparison analysis; however, they cannot provide the “total” picture of why a particular student 

has either succeeded or failed (Burnaford et al., 2001; Gall et al., 1996; Meloy, 2002; The 

Qualitative Versus Quantitative Analysis, 2003; The Qualitative Versus Quantitative Debate, 

2003).  In order to measure student academic achievement more effectively, states, school 

124

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

districts, and teachers can use authentic assessments, which measure the progress of the “whole 

academic student.”

Standardized Testing and LEP Students

In the age of educational accountability, states and school districts face an increased 

number of responsibilities.  Three major areas of concern in education are students who are 

culturally and linguistically diverse, students who are at risk of failure to meet new and 

challenging standards, and students who have special needs.  The increased responsibilities have 

placed added pressure on educators as they continue to teach to a more diversified student body. 

At the same time, they must help all of their students reach academic achievement according to 

their rigorous state and school district standards.  For many limited English proficient (LEP) 

students, there has been no system of accountability in place that ensures whether or not they 

have achieved the same high standards that have been set for English-speaking students.  There 

has been inconsistency amongst states when recording LEP students’ progress in their language 

development and/or attainment of content area skills and knowledge (cite a source).  Without an 

accountability system in place, the achievement gap between LEP students and English-speaking 

students will continue to exist (Hernandez, 2002).

An analysis of reports from state education agencies were compiled by the National 

Clearinghouse for Bilingual Education for the U.S. Department of Education’s Office of 

Bilingual Education and Minority Languages Affairs (OBEMLA) (1997).  The study indicated 

that LEP students were exempt from such assessments if they have been in the United States or 

125

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

enrolled in ESL/bilingual education programs for three years or less.  Limited English proficient 

students were also permitted exemption based on their English language proficiency level. 

Today, this ruling is still in effect and reinforced with the passing of the “No Child Left Behind 

Act 2001” (Holmes, Hedlund, & Nickerson, 2000; Lachat, 1999; No Child Left Behind Act of 

2001; Wisconsin DPI, 2002).

Then Congress enacted the "No Child Left Behind Act of 2001."  Title III of the Act 

concerns assessment.  LEP students are to be assessed annually to ensure that they are making 

"adequate yearly progress" (No Child Left Behind Act of 2001; Wisconsin DPI, 2002).  The 

NCLB act requires that States create and implement annual assessments aligned to their current 

academic content standards, by the 2005–2006 school year.  In addition, all students, including 

students identified as LEP, who have had at least one year of English instruction, will be required 

to take the assessments in English.  States and school districts must analyze the results to 

measure achievement gains, set a beginning “achievement bar” then “raise the bar” in equal 

increments at least once every three years.  This new legislation requires that within 12 years, all 

students must reach 100% English proficiency in their basic skills (Hass, 2002).  Because of this 

new emphasis on accountability for all students’ learning, and particularly LEP students, all 

involved parties- states, school districts, administrators, teachers, and students themselves-are 

greatly affected by the new requirements (Hernandez, 2002; Lachat, 1999; Menken, 2000; 

Riddle, 1999).

  Some schools have reverted to teaching just the basics.  This instructional change causes 

a narrowing of the curriculum, affecting what and how LEP students acquire knowledge that is 

assessed (Hernandez, 2002).  By narrowing their LEP students’ curriculum, teachers limit their 

126

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

students’ equal educational opportunities.  States and school districts must comply with the Title 

VI obligation to provide equal educational opportunities to their LEP students.  Under Title VI, 

school districts must identify LEP students, and provide them with an academic program or a 

service that enables them to acquire English-language proficiency.  Teachers are obligated to help 

LEP students gain the knowledge and skills that are expected of all students.  This includes 

providing meaningful opportunities for LEP students to acquire the academic knowledge and 

skills covered by tests required for graduation or other educational benefits (Hernandez, 2002). 

Many APA (Asian American and Pacific Islander) students, particularly 
(English   Language   Learners)   ELLs,   are   likely   to   be   harmed   by   new 
policies requiring standardized testing for promotion and graduation.  New 
York State recently began a policy requiring all students to pass new more 
difficult  Regents exams in  English.    Most  ELL  students  have  not  had 
proper access to the English Language Arts curriculum. Furthermore, in 
the last four years, the percentage of APA students dropping out of high 
school   has   risen   by   a   higher   proportion   than   any   other   group.     Most 
advocates suspect that the new graduation policy is the main factor in this 
rise.  (Chin, 2000, p. 5)

The standards-based education reform movement has had serious implications for LEP 

students, leading many educators and members of the community to be concerned.  Across the 

country, as new laws are enacted and enforced, numerous states and school districts are 

subjecting LEP students to these high-stakes tests and are holding them accountable to the same 

standards and benchmarks as English speaking students (ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; 

Lachat, 1999; Urquhart, 2002).  As schools become increasingly diverse, administrators and 

teachers are becoming concerned about how they will effectively implement and achieve this 

goal.  Teachers are face with considerable challenges on how to implement these standards while 

127

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

still providing an appropriate education for their students (Crawford, 1997; Duignan, 2000; 

ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Lachat, 1999; Urquhart, 2002).  

In the last decade, enrollment of LEP students in the nation's public schools has increased 

105%.  According to the 1990 Census, our educational system had an LEP population from the 

age of 5 to 14 of about 6.3 million.  Today, over 8.6 million immigrant children are in U.S. 

schools and nearly 40% require some sort of language assistance, totaling 3.2 million LEP 

students nationwide (Hakuta, 2001).  There are 1.3 million students in state and local bilingual 

programs, and over 75% of LEP students attend schools in high poverty areas (ELLKBase, 2002; 

Hakuta, 2001; Lachat, 1999; Urquhart, 2002).  There are over 640,000 LEP students not being 

serviced through any type of language assistance programs.  As more and more LEP students 

enter our school systems, educators need alternative ways to assess each of student’s language 

development appropriately (Crawford, 1997; Duignan, 2000; ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; 

Lachat, 1999; Urquhart, 2002). 

 The President’s Advisory Commission on Educational Excellence for Hispanic 

Americans (2000) supported standards-based school improvement, yet the involved officials 

remain cautious (Chin, J. 2000).  They are questioning the ramifications of the high-stakes 

assessments being imposed on U.S. LEP students, particularly Hispanic students.  The 

commission stated that the LEP students alone will bear the consequences of academic failure or 

success that is associated with their tests scores, while these results may be misleading and/or 

inaccurate.  They believe this is a significant risk, which undermines the educational future of all 

LEP students (Robertson, 2000).  

128

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

The U.S. Department of Education Office of Civil Rights (OCR) has received numerous 

complaints and inquiries from K-12 administration, teachers, and parents regarding 

discrimination toward LEP students in regards to high-stakes learning.  The OCR has 

responsibility for enforcing Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Title IX of the Education 

Amendments of 1972, Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, and Title II of the 

Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990.  These statutes prohibit educational institutions that 

receive federal funds from discrimination on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, and 

disability (Robertson, 2000). 

Parents have demanded that their LEP children have equal access to testing in their native 

language.  LEP parents from San Francisco, California to Miami-Dade County, Florida have 

protested against their children being tested in English, a language their children do not clearly 

understand.  They claim that traditional testing is a waste of time and money that serves to only 

to embarrass their children (Pinzur, 2003; Robertson, 2000).  

The American Federation of Teachers (AFT) has also voiced their concerns with regard to 

the standards-based education reform movement (Robertson, 2000).  Officials at the AFT are 

worried that states and school districts are only focusing on students achievement based on 

assessments, when there are ignored issues that can result in student failure.  These other issues 

include the lack of curriculum development, lack of supplies (such as textbooks), and the lack of 

teacher training needed to support standards-based school improvement.  States and school 

districts are setting their LEP students up for failure when their teachers have not been provided 

with strategies on how to prepare LEP students for the required exams (Robertson, 2000).

129

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

These high-stakes tests will have a tremendous impact on LEP students and their 

learning.  LEP students acquire their English through a lengthy, highly idiosyncratic, and difficult 

process (Fontana, 2002).  Second Language Acquisition is a developmental process in which a 

language learner proceeds.  Some people become bilingual by learning two languages 

developmentally at the same time.  This happens when one has had an extended amount of 

opportunities to speak both languages (Abella, Shneyderman, & Urrutia, 2003; Crawford, 1997; 

Duignan, 2000; ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Krashen, 2002; Lachat, 1999). 

For many LEP students, standardized tests are conducted in English and often do not 

allow LEP students to demonstrate their academic achievement.  According to a recent Miami-

Dade County schools’ study: 

Standardized tests, which are given in English, do not accurately, measure 
the knowledge of students who have spoken another language for most of 
their   lives.     Those   exams   --   especially   the   Florida   Comprehensive 
Assessment Test -- can determine a student's advancement and graduation, 
leading the study's author to contend that recent immigrants may be at a 
serious disadvantage.  (Pinzur, 2003, p. 1)

Some LEP students do not have a strong command of the English language, and are not able to 

discern the appropriate response on a test.  This lack of English proficiency forces LEP students 

to guess the answers to some test questions.  The resulting test score is thus an invalid 

measurement of these students’ true knowledge (Cesar, 2002; Crawford, 1997; Duigan, 2000; 

Hernandez, 2002; Pinzur, 2003).  Students who are administered any standardized assessment 

often need to have a firm command of the English language (reading, writing and/or oral skills). 

LEP students, more often than not, are administered standardized assessments when they do not 

have sufficient literacy or fluency skills in English,and  this may introduce construct-irrelevant 

130

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

components to the testing process.  By requiring LEP students to test in English before they have 

attained reasonable levels of proficiency only serves to confirm what their language teachers 

(Bilingual and/or ESL) already know:  LEP students are often not yet ready to test in English 

(Cesar, 2002; Crawford, 1997; Duigan, 2000; Hernandez, 2002; Pinzur, 2003). 

Although some students are legally and rightfully excluded from taking standardized 

assessments, such as special education students who have an active Individual Educational Plan 

(IEP), LEP students are mandated to take these high-stakes assessments in English.  The rules 

when assessing LEP students with standardized test vary from state to state as well as from 

district to district.  Local standards become particularly complex as states and districts move 

toward the broader inclusion of LEP students in their standardized assessments and systems of 

accountability.  States and school districts offer LEP students the same tests as those taken by 

native English speakers, but with special testing accommodations that are intended to “level the 

playing field.”  Each state varies in the accommodations it permits (Iowa Testing, 1999; IPT, 

2000; Lachat, 1999).  Therefore, standardized assessments are neither the most effective nor 

accurate measurements for limited English proficient students (LEP) when compared to 

alternative assessments which can be utilized as an effective measurement of limited English 

proficient students’ achievement.

131

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

 LEP Students and Language Ability Levels

Since the enactment of the NCLB act, standardized assessments will play an integral part 

in determining states’ LEP students’ academic proficiency (ELLKBase, 2002; No Child Left 

Behind Act of 2001; Wisconsin DPI, 2002).  To level the playing field of those LEP students who 

are administered and mandated to take and pass these tests, it is imperative that states consider 

the language development of their LEP students.  When decisions are made affecting students' 

educational opportunities and benefits, it is important that they be made accurately and fairly. 

These assessments should measure LEP students' abilities, knowledge, skills, or needs, and  do 

so in ways that do not violate federal law of discrimination on the basis of students' race, national 

origin, sex, or disability.  Any assessment of LEP student’s content-area knowledge administered 

in English may be greatly influenced by the student’s English language proficiency.  If LEP 

students were not proficient in English, any testing done in English would primarily be just an 

English language proficiency exam and not necessarily a measure of content knowledge (Cesar, 

2002; Crawford, 1997; Duigan, 2000; Hernandez, 2002; Menken, 2000; Pinzur, 2003; Robertson, 

2000).  It is uncertain at what point a child should be tested in a second language to yield more 

meaningful results (Menken, 2000). 

A student learning two languages typically progresses through one of the following paths:

1. Simultaneous Bilingualism: When a student speaks Spanish or their primary 

language with their parents and English with their siblings and friends.

132

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

2.   Receptive Bilingualism: Occurs when students receive a high exposure to a 

second language throughout their lives, but have little opportunities to use the 

language.  

3. Rapid Sequential Bilingualism: Is when students learn a second language after 

their first language has already been established.

4.   Slow Sequential Bilingualism: Is when students with little to no exposure to 

English have few opportunities to practice their English skills (Crawford, 1997; 

Duignan, 2000; ELLKBase, 2002; Hakuta, 2001; Krashen, 2002; Lachat, 1999).

Some states are actively trying to level the playing field of their LEP students when it 

comes to standardized assessments and measuring their LEP students’ academic proficiency. 

Limited English proficient students in Wisconsin must take an annual language proficiency exam 

such as the Language Assessment Scale (LAS) or Idea Proficiency Tests (IPT).  Based on the 

results, LEP students are classified and are placed into one of six recognized language levels; this 

classification helps school districts and teachers to determine the level of English language 

instruction best suited for the states’ LEP students.  The following describes the language 

abilities of LEP students according to the English language proficiency levels.  These were 

adapted from the definitions given in PI 13.03(3) (a)-(e), Wisconsin Administration Code; they 

also align with the IPT-I Oral English, Forms: C & D, English Proficiency Tests.  The state of 

Wisconsin’s Department of Public Instruction (DPI) uses language level scale of 7.  The levels 

are:  

133

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

In a pre-productive stage, or DPI Level 1, the student will often use their home language 

to communicate.

  

When everyone around these students is speaking a different language than the 

students, such as English, the students may stop speaking entirely because they are frustrated, or 

they may speak their native language

.

  At some point, students quit speaking in their native 

language because no one will respond to them in their first language.  Students will go through a 

period of not talking, which may be brief or it can last up to a year.  Even though they are not 

speaking in English at this time, they are absorbing the language; they will attempt to 

communicate through non-verbal gestures or mimes.  These students should not be subjected to 

standardized assessments due to their limited English ability.  If testing is required, these students 

should have accommodations and/or perhaps should use alternative (authentic) assessments to 

determine their academic progress (IPT, 2000; Wisconsin DPI, 2000).  

The second language developmental stage (DPI Level 2) is the early-productive stage, in 

which the students are basically nonverbal.  Their speech is still not fluent but telegraphic.  They 

use words like, “Go bathroom!”  “Drink water!”  This is the period in which students begin to 

crack the code of their second language.  Students in this stage use simple sentences in English, 

such as isolated words and expressions.  During this stage, LEP students are at an emergent level 

of reading and writing in English.  During this stage, LEP students should not be administered 

standardized assessments without accommodations.  The use of alternative assessments to 

determine their academic progress is appropriate (IPT, 2000; Wisconsin DPI, 2000).  

The third stage of language acquisition is called the speech-emergence stage, or DPI 

Level 3.  In this period of language development, students are "ready for the lime light." 

Students are considered to have “playground” language (or speech).  Non-ESL teachers will 

134

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

often question why students are placed in the program when they are speaking English.  People 

will hear students speaking English on the playground and think they are fluent English speakers, 

yet they are not.  This is the first form of English, LEP students learn, and it is classified as 

survival English.  These students know enough language to get by with their peers, yet they may 

not have the full capabilities to understand academic language, which is formally tested. 

Students are post-emergent, developing reading comprehension, and writing skills in English. 

Their English literacy skills allow them to demonstrate academic knowledge in content areas 

with assistance.  It is in this stage of language development that the standardized assessment 

becomes controversial.  Some States have declared students ready for standardized assessments 

with or without accommodations at Level 3.  To increase students’ success, students at this stage 

should be allowed accommodations (IPT, 2000; Wisconsin DPI, 2000).

Students then merge into an advanced intermediate level, which is DPI Level 4.  During 

this stage of language development, students’ speech is beyond telegraphic utterances and 

memorized word chunks.  They begin to form sentence structure and grammatical patterns.  With 

time, students will begin to demonstrate understanding of syntactic language.  Minor 

grammatical errors, at this point, are evident; however, students are more competent in their new 

language.  At this language development stage, students’ comprehension is building, and they 

begin to develop the academic language needed to pass standardized assessments implemented in 

many states.  Students in this level should take standardized assessments with accommodations 

(IPT, 2000; Wisconsin DPI, 2000).  

Not until the Advanced level of language development, or DPI Level 5, do the students 

understand and speak conversational and academic English well.  Students are near proficient in 

135

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

reading, writing, and the content area skills needed to meet grade level expectations.  Students 

require occasional support.  During standardized assessments, students at Level 5 should be 

allowed accommodations because they are still not considered fully fluent (IPT, 2000; Wisconsin 

DPI, 2000). 

DPI Level 6 is the reclassification from being LEP to Fully English Proficient (FEP). 

During this stage, FEP students understand, speak, read, and write in English.  They possess 

critical thinking skills, which enable them to succeed in academic classes at or above grade level. 

FEP students do not need accommodations during standardized assessments (IPT, 2000; 

Wisconsin DPI, 2000).

Level 7 according to Wisconsin DPI’s language levels are those students who were never 

classified as limited-English proficient and do not fit the definition of a limited English proficient 

student outlined in the "No Child Left Behind Act" of 2001 Title IX sec. 9101(25)(A)-

(D)(Wisconsin DPI, 2000).  This includes native English speakers.

States are implementing changes or alterations in the language assessment process in 

order to comply with current law of the “No Child Left Behind Act 2001.”  In the state of 

Wisconsin, during the 2001-2002 school year, LEP students at Level 4 or 5 were mandated to 

take the state assessments and district assessments, but were allowed to have accommodations. 

In the 2002-2003 school year, to comply with the NCLB law, the DPI changed the rules of 

assessment: the DPI lowered assessment levels to students at Level 3-5.  During these stages, the 

DPI continues to grant accommodations for those LEP students Levels 3-5; however, a Level 6 

or 7 student would not be granted any accommodations.  Students who are at Levels 1 and 2 are 

required to take alternative performance assessments.  

136

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Fortunately some states, school districts, and teachers have recognized that standardized 

assessments are not the most effective ways to measure their LEP students’ success and are 

relying on alternative (authentic) forms of assessments as way to effectively measure their LEP 

students’ success such as authentic assessments.  When States, school districts, and teachers fail 

to accommodate the assessment needs of their LEP students, they hinder their LEP students’ 

progress, thus giving them an ineffective education.  This may result in failure, low self-esteem, 

and/or halting of learning, which is in direct violation of their civil right to an equal education. 

Educational policymakers, states, school districts, and the Federal government should continue to 

collaborate to ensure that educational practices do not unfairly deny educational opportunities to 

LEP students (Iowa Testing Programs, 1999; Wisconsin DPI, 2000).  

Alternative/Authentic Assessments

Standardized assessments are neither the most effective nor accurate measurements for 

limited English proficient students (LEP) when compared to alternative assessments (also termed 

authentic assessments), which can be utilized as an effective measurement of limited English 

proficient students’ achievement (Hancock, 1994; Garvin, 1996; Wiggins, 1990).  With shifts in 

pedagogical theories of learning, and as more research on effective best practices for teaching 

LEP students is surfacing, language teachers are now beginning to incorporate authentic lessons 

into their classrooms that are student centered, hands-on, cooperative, and involve 

communicative approaches to learning (Hancock, 1994; Garvin, 1996; Wiggins, 1990).  Through 

authentic assessments (or alternative), teachers are able to integrate their assessments with 

137

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

various classroom activities, and the assessments may be linked to the programs' goals and 

objectives.  Language teachers use alternative assessments that are aligned with their LEP 

students’ language proficiencies, learning styles, cultural and educational backgrounds, and grade 

levels (Hancock, 1994; Garvin, 1996; Wiggins, 1990).

 “Alternative assessment is an ongoing process that involves the student and the teacher in 

making judgments about the students’ progress in language using non-conventional ways” 

(Hancock, 1994, p. 2).  Alternative (authentic) assessments are by definition criterion-referenced 

which is an authentic approach based on classroom activities that represents students’ progress 

towards meeting instructional goals.  Alternative assessments (A.A.s) require students to 

demonstrate skills and knowledge by engaging in a complex performance, creating a significant 

product, or accomplishing a complex task using higher order thinking, problem solving, and 

often creativity.  These assessments require real-world applications of skills and knowledge that 

have meaning beyond the assessment activity (Garvin, 1996; Hancock, 1994; Mc Laughlin, 

1995; Peterson, 2002). 

“Authentic assessment refers to any type of evaluation that requires a student to use their 

talents to express their understanding in a way that allows the evaluator to determine how deep 

that understanding is” (Garvin, 1996, p.1).  Authentic/alternative assessments present more of a 

qualitative form of assessment than traditional standardized tools, which typically use 

quantitative methods of assessment (Kerka, 1995).  They are learning experiences, which engage 

students and can be aligned with the states’ and districts’ standards.  Authentic/alternative 

assessments include a variety of measurements that may be altered for different educational 

situations (Archibald & Newman, 1988).  These assessments allow educators to adapt traditional 

138

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

methods and integrate assessments hand in hand with their instructional approaches Alternative 

assessments allow language teachers (Bilingual/ESL) to focus on students’ analytical skills and 

their ability to share what they have learned in a more creative fashion.  LEP students can 

demonstrate physically what they know.  Students may be asked to perform hands-on type 

activities, act out specific vocabulary, or give non-verbal signs to specific “yes or no” questions. 

When working cooperatively, in pairs or in groups, LEP students can demonstrate their oral 

and/or language skills (Archibald & Newman, 1988).  

In Authentic Assessment for English Language Learners , Valdez-Pierce and O'Malley 

(1992) presented a number of practical approaches to implementing authentic assessment for 

LEP students.  The authors described how teachers could integrate assessments and instruction so 

that the two are virtually indistinguishable.  Results from these assessments may be combined 

with results from standardized tests or language proficiency tests to profile LEP students' 

competency in their language of study, content and academic communication skills.  This allows 

the teacher to form a more realistic picture of the “whole” student’s academic development.  In 

addition, this type of assessment provides teachers with frequent feedback on their instruction, 

allowing them to adjust their curriculum to meet the varied needs of their LEP students in a 

timely manner.

Performance and Portfolio Assessments

Some popular forms of alternative assessments are performance assessments, portfolio 

assessments, and open-ended assessments.  “Performance assessment and portfolios are typically 

139

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

seen as sources of teacher and student empowerment because control over assessment shifts from 

the administrators to those linked most closely to the instruction" (Valdez-Pierce & O’Malley, 

1992, p. 2).  Performance assessments may be designed by the teacher to assess a specific skill 

and/or competency in relation to an agreed upon standard.  Often, the performance assessments 

will reflect a specific task and will require a rater to judge whether the student accomplished the 

tasks he/she was asked to perform.  

When assessments are tied to standards, students must demonstrate what they know and 

perform the task, requiring high order thinking and complex problem solving skills.  They offer a 

better way to measure the achievement of high standards as well as to accommodate LEP 

learners' unique needs.  Performance-based assessments have the following characteristics. 

These programs: 1) compare student achievement to an agreed upon level of proficiency; 2) 

solicit higher order thinking process; 3) emphasize contextual importance through assessment 

tasks using real-life problems involving multiple steps; and 4) invite students to problem solve 

within groups or alone (Lachat, 1999, p. 24). 

Portfolio assessments are used in various classrooms throughout the United States. 

Language teachers can easily integrate and implement the use of portfolios during any phase of 

their LEP students’ language development.  They are an ongoing assessment involving the LEP 

student and the teacher selecting numerous work samples or artifacts and displaying them in a 

portfolio.  The primary purpose of portfolios is to show LEP student’s progress.  “Portfolios 

allow teachers to see the student as an individual, each with his or her own unique set of 

characteristics, needs and strengths" (Epstein, 2000, p. 1).  This type of authentic assessment 

includes teacher documentations, observations, and/or checklists.  They may also include journal 

140

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

entries and writing samples of students.  The language teacher can include a recording of the 

student speaking and reading over a specific time to show growth and development of their 

language.  LEP students can place artwork, diagrams, charts, and graphs of their own inside. 

Portfolio artifacts should be accompanied by a reflection from the LEP student, if possible, or 

from the teacher.  The student and/or the teacher should explain why the particular artifact was 

chosen to be part of the student’s portfolio.  Performance based assessments and portfolios may 

be used as documentation when considering the re-designation of a student from LEP to FEP 

status (Epstein, 2000; Garvin 1996; Hancock, 1994; Lachat, 1999; Pearson Education 

Development Group, 2000; Valdez-Pierce & O’Malley, 1992).  

Rubrics 

Scoring students’ work is a necessary part of the authentic assessment process.  Teachers 

should establish criteria for scoring according to the developmental levels of English: Non-

English Proficiency (NEP or Level 1), Limited English Proficiency (Level 2-5), and Fluent 

English Proficiency (Level 6-7).  “Holistic scoring procedures evaluate performance as a whole 

rather than by it separate linguistic or grammatical features” (Valdez-Pierce & O’Malley, 1992, 

p. 5).  The scoring criteria needs to be holistic and focused on LEP students’ abilities and their 

level of effort.  

To score students’ work, teachers need to develop a rubric in order to determine their LEP 

students’ learning outcomes.  A rubric is used to establish a performance scale expected by the 

student.  In some cases, students are required to work cooperatively, and they must apply their 

141

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

skills and concepts to a specific problem or task.  Rubrics are often seen in mathematics or in 

writing.  Every rubric should focus on a specific skill and solely evaluate specific measurable 

criteria.  Rubrics may focus on how LEP students develop and express their learning.  The rubric 

should be specific and kept short; it may be a numeric scale ranging from 1 through 5.  Some 

teachers may require their students to perform a short scenario to assess the skills they have 

mastered (Epstein, 2000; Garvin 1996; Hancock, 1994; Lachat, 1999; Miles, 1991; Pearson 

Education Development Group, 2000; Pickett, 1999; Valdez-Pierce & O’Malley, 1992; Wiggins, 

1990).   

Conclusion

Regardless of how one feels about standardized assessements, they are here to stay. 

Assessements are used today in ways that may profoundly shape the lives of LEP students.  To 

be effective, assessments should also be used in effective ways which accurately reflect 

educational standards and that do not deny opportunities or benefits to LEP students based on 

their race, nationality (including limited English proficiency), sex, and/or disability.  All 

standardized tests should be used as instruments by educators to help their students achieve their 

full potential regardless of their language ability.  School districts and schools should utilize the 

educational test scores in ways that benefit students.  Most importantly, before assessments are 

implemented and evaluated, they should be designed to help school districts, schools, and 

teachers irradicate inequalities in the kinds of educational opportunities their students are 

142

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

receiving; thus, educators may utlize this knowledge to support educational efforts that ensure 

that all students have equal opportunity to achieve high standards. 

If standardized tests indicate performance gaps, school districts and schools should focus 

on the quality of educational opportunities afforded to under-performing students and restructure 

their programs to meet their needs as well.  While evaluating the effectiveness of these 

assessments in terms of the context of standards-based reforms and the use of tests as measures 

of student accountability, educators should consider the following inquiry: have all students been 

provided quality instruction, sufficient resources, and the kind of learning environment that 

fosters academic success?

Standardized tests, when used in combination with other assessment techniques such as 

observing students, evaluating daily work, meeting with parents, and tracking students' 

development, can help provide teachers with a better picture of a student’s abilities, level of 

knowledge, and learning needs.  Some school districts are adjusting their policies to 

accommodate both individual learning needs and the state's standards (Robertson, 2000).  Using 

a “one-size-fits-all” approach to assessment (standardized) is a quick fix to a very complex 

problem.  It is evident that testing LEP students in English is necessary in order to determine 

their progress and growth in English language skills; however, assessments should be directly 

correlated to LEP students’ needs and instruction (Fontana, 2002).  Knowledge of language 

acquisition and developmental levels assigned to individual students should guide educators on 

when it is best to implement standardized testing.   

Students who are not yet at a predetermined language level should be taught by teachers 

who are given the freedom to use authentic assessments.  By implementing alternative 

143

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

assessments into language assistance programs, teachers will have a wide range of evidence to 

support whether or not their LEP students are meeting their language academic goals and 

objectives.  Because LEP students have unique individual language needs, language teachers 

(Bilingual/ESL) must be able to use any alternative means to effectively assess their students, 

which enables their students to enjoy a variety of methodologies for displaying what they have 

learned in the classroom.  With A. A., teachers are demanding academic excellence from their 

LEP students by challenging their students to reach the ultimate goal of language fluency, 

academic excellence, and mainstreaming.  Using authentic assessment will allow teachers to 

meet the individual needs of their LEP students and value their diversity. 

Alternative assessments can provide an effective way to improve instruction and learning, 

which in the end will promote lifelong learning.  By nature, A.A.s require integrated knowledge 

and skills, rely on scorer interpretation, and are less standardized than other traditional 

assessments (Lachat, 1999).  Therefore, states and school districts should adopt a variety of 

assessment practices that are inclusive of all students regardless of their language needs and 

abilities.  There is little evidence indictaing that one single assessment can accurately measure 

what students know.  Before states, school districts, and schools adopt a variety of assessements 

for their LEP students, they should keep in mind the whole picture: costs, benefits, 

consequences, and the feasibility (Lachat, 1999). Because of the inherent benefits, A. A.s can be 

utilized throughout a student's educational career.  

144

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Appendix A

Types of Alternative Assessments 

Portfolios
Student-authored books
Models
Posters
Displays
Murals
Newsletters
Brochures or pamphlets
Graphic organizers
Drawings
Oral reports
Interviews
Story Telling
Story or text retelling
Book talks
Literature circles
Journal writings
Essays (process writing pieces)
Research papers
Role-plays
Experiments 
Debates
Drama (dialogues, skits, plays)
Use of technology

(Epstein, 2000; Garvin 1996; Hancock, 1994; Pearson Education Development Group, 2000).

145

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

References

            
Abella, R., Shneyderman, A. & Urrutia, J. (2003, February). An examination of the validity of 

English language achievement test scores in a LEP student population. Miami-Dade 
County Public Schools.

American Educational Research Association (1999). American psychological association & 

national council on measurement in education, standards of educational and 
Psychological Testing (Introduction). 

Anstrom, K. (1995). New directions for Chapter 1/Title I. Directions in language and education. 

National Clearinghouse for Bilingual Education, Washington, DC. Retrieved June 29, 
2003, from  http://www.ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/directions/07.htm.

Archibald, D. A., & Newmann, F. M. (1988). Beyond standardized testing: Assessing authentic 

academic achievement in the secondary school. Reston, VA: National Association of 
School Principals. 

Assessing language development in bilingual preschool children. Retrieved January 3, 2003, 

from http://www.ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs

 

 .  

August, D. (1995, Fall). For all students: Limited English proficient students and Goals 2000. 

Retrieved January 3, 2003, from NCBE Focus: Occasional Papers in Bilingual Education: 
http:www.ncela.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/focus/focus10.htm.

August, D., & Hakuta, K. (1997). Educating language-minority children. Committee on 

Developing a Research Agenda on the Education of Limited-English-Proficient and 
Bilingual Students, Board on Children, Youth, and Families, National Research Council. 
Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

Bagin, C. B. & Rudner, L.M.  (1996). What should parents know about standardized testing in 

schools? Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 
http://npin.org/library/1998/n00030/n00030.html.

Burnaford, G., Fischer, J., & Hobson, D. (2001). Teachers doing research.  A power of action 

through inquiry.  London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Cantu, Norma V. & Riley, Richard W. (2000, Dec.).The use of tests as part of high-stakes 

decision-making for students: A Resource Guide for Educators and Policy-Makers. U.S. 
Department of Education Office for Civil Rights.

146

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Cesar, L. (2002, Spring). Stanford Educator. Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 

http://ed.stanford.edu/suse/educator/fall2002/pages/forum-fall02.html.

Chin, J. (2000). The President’s Advisory Commission on Asian Americans and Pacific Islanders 

and the White House Initiative on Asian Americans

 

and Pacific Islanders

 . (2000). 

Retrieved

 

November 12, 2002 from 

http://www.asiaxpress.com/Articles/john_chin/townhallmeeting/townhall_meeting.htm. 

Clark, L & White, N. (2003, May 24). Some who fail FCAT still may get a diploma. Gov. Bush 

wants state to consider students' scores on college exams. The Miami Herald.  Retrieved 
May 25, 2003, from 
http://www.miami.com/mld/miamiherald/living/education/5934464.htm.

Crawford, J. (1997). Best Evidence: Research Foundations of the Bilingual Education Act. 

Retrieved January 12, 2003, from http://www.ncbegwu.edu

 

 .  

Duignan, P. (2000). Bilingual education: A critique. Retrieved January 12, 2003 from 

http://hoover.standord.edu

 

 .  

ELLKBase-The English Language Learner Knowledgebase (2002). A framework for alternative 

language programs. Region VII Comprehensive Center. Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 
http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/practitionerstips/Framework_ALP.shtml.

Epstein, A. (2000). Assessment: Portfolio Assessment: Introduction. Retrieved June 29, 2003, 

from http://www.teachervision.com

 

 .  

Fontana, R. M. (2002). Stanford Educator. Retrieved June 28, 2003, from 

http://ed.stanford.edu/suse/educator/fall2002/pages/forum-fall02.html.

Gall, M. D., Borg, W. R. & Gall, J. P.  (1996).  Educational research.  An introduction.  (6

th

 ed.). 

White Plains, NY: Longman.

Garvin, I. (1996). Authentic-alternative assessment. Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 

http://iteachnet.org.

Hancock, C. R. (1994). Alternative assessment and second language study: What and why? 

Retrieved June 29, 2003, from Eric Digest Available: 
http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/

 

 .  

Hakuta, K. (2001, April 13). The education of language minority students. Paper presented at 

United States Commission on Civil Rights. Retrieved September, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Docs/CivilRightsCommision.htm.

147

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Hass, B. (2002, Fall). How equitable is U.S. education for English language learners? Stanford 

Educator.  Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 
http://ed.stanford.edu/suse/educator/fall2002/pages/article-us-education-fall02.html.

Hernandez, A. (2002, Spring). Stanford Educator. Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 

http://ed.stanford.edu/suse/educator/fall2002/pages/forum-fall02.html.

Heubert, J. P. & Hauser, R. M. (1999). High stakes: Testing for tracking, promotion, and 

graduation. National Research Council. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

Idea Proficiency Tests- IPT Testing (2000). Retrieved June 29, 2003, from http://www.ballard-

tighe.com/catalog/ipt03.htm

 

 .  

Iowa Testing Programs (1999). Using the tests. Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 

http://www.uiowa.edu/~itp/use-specialneeds.htm

 

 .  

Kayser, H. (2000). From the heart. Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 

http://www.bilingualtherapies.com/Dr.says/.

Kerka, S. (1995). Practice application brief techniques for authentic assessment. Retrieved June 

29, 2003, from http://ericacve.org/docs/auth-pab.htm

 

 .  

Krashen, S. (2002). Term limits. Class dismissed. Retrieved October 21, 2002, from 

http://www.americas.org/News/Features/200112

 

 -  

Blingual_Education/2001110_letters.htm.

Lachat, M. A. (1999). What policy makers and school administrators need to know about 

assessment reform for English language learners. The Education Alliance. Retrieved 
September 25, 2002, from http://www.lab.brown.edu.

Laturnau, J. (2002). Standards-based instruction for English language learners.  Retrieved June 

29, 2002, from http://www.prel.org/products/pc_/standards-based.htm

 

 .  

Meloy, Judith M.  (2002).  Writing the qualitative dissertation.  Understanding by doing. 

London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

Menken, K. (2000). What are the critical issues in wide-scale assessment of English language 

learners? Framing effective practice: Topics and issues in education English language 
learners. NCBE. Retrieved June 29, 2002, from 
http://www.ncela.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/tasynthesis/framing/3criticalissues.htm.

Miles, T. (1991). Criteria for complex performance-based assessments.  Retrieved June 29, 2002, 

from  http://vmsgophercua.edu

 

 .  

148

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

National Clearinghouse for Bilingual Education. (1997). High stakes assessment: A research 

agenda for English language learners. Symposium summary. Retrieved June 29, 2002, 
from  http://www.ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/reports/highstakes/symposium.htm.

New York City Board of Education. (2000, Jan.). Class of 1996 four-year longitudinal report and 

1998-1999 event dropout rates.   

National Research Council (1982). High stakes. Placing children in special education: A strategy 

for equity.   

No Child Left Behind Act of 2001 Title IX sec. 9101(25)(A)-(D)

Patten, P. (2000). Standardized testing in schools. Parent News [Online], 6(1). Retrieved 

September 29, 2002, from http://npin.org/pnews/2000/pnew100/feat100.html

 

 .  

Pearson Education Development Group (2000). Authentic assessment overview. Retrieved June 

30, 2002, from  http://www.teachervison.com.

Peterson, K. Authentic assessment and school wide projects. Retrieved from 

http://www.wcer.wisc.edu/ccvi/pubs/publication/archive/newsletter/Winter1997_Weaving
AuthenticAssessment/AuthAssessment_SchoolwideProj.htm

 

 .  

Pickett, N. (1999). Guidelines for rubric development. Retrieved June 30, 2002, from 

http://edweb.sdsu.edu.

Pinzur, M. (2003, January). Even after English lesson, foreign kids lag on tests. Retrieved July 

26, 2002, from  http://oer.dadeschools.net/nabe03paper.pdf

 

 .   

Pinzur, M. (2003, May 7). At low-scoring schools, poverty often is fact of life. The Miami 

Herald.  Retrieved May 21, 2003, from 
http://www.miami.com/mld/miamiherald/5801560.htm.

The qualitative versus quantitative analysis (2003).  Retrieved April 5, 2003, from 

http://www.ling.lancs.ac.uk/monkey/ihe/linguistics/corpus3/3qual.htm

.

The qualitative versus quantitative debate ( 2003).  Retrieved March 20, 2003, from 

http://writing.colostate.edu/references/research/gentrans/pop2f.cfm.

Robertson, A. (2000, November/December).  High-stakes" testing: New guidelines help direct 

school change. Parent News. Retrieved March 20, 2003, from 
http://npin.org/pnews/2000/pnew1100/int1100b.html.

149

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Shepard, L. A., & Dougherty, K. (1991, April). Effects of high-stakes testing on instruction. 

Paper presented at the annual meetings of the American Educational Research 
Association, Chicago, IL. ERIC Document No. ED337468. Retrieved March 20, 2003.

Tannenbaum, J. (1996). Practical ideas on alternative assessment for ESL students. Retrieved 

March 20, 2003, from http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/

 

 .  

Urquhart, (first initial)(2002, November/December).  Three faces of diversity.  Principal. 

Retrieved March 20, 2003, from http://www.naesp.org/comm/p1102c.htm.

Valdez, L. & O’Malley, M. (1992).  Performance and portfolio assessment for language minority 

students. Retrieved March 20, 2003, from http://www.ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs.

Wiggins, G. (1990). The case for authentic assessment. Retrieved  February 19, 2003,  from Eric 

Digest: http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/

 

 .  

Winerip, M. (2003, May 21).  Pupil held back, a heavier burden. New York Times. 

Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction (2000). Alternative assessment. Retrieved  February 

19, 2003,  from http://www.dpi.state.wi.us/

 

 .  

150

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

QUESTION 5

Analyze how brain-based research has impacted teaching and learning strategies of limited 
English proficient students.  What professional development strategies can be implemented to 
train teachers to improve the linguistic and academic development of limited English proficient 
students (SDAIE and CALLA)?

Even though some U.S. school districts have over 90 languages represented within their 

schools, language teachers continue to successfully guide and facilitate their LEP students’ 

learning while at the same time meeting the rigorous demands of their states and school districts 

(Duignan, 2000, p. 2).  Mainstreamed educators often question how these language teachers are 

successfully educating their LEP students within a multilingual environment.  By accumulating, 

investigating, evaluating, and applying the contributions of brain-based research, language 

teachers are able to effectively teach, present materials, and contribute to the cognitive 

development of their LEP students (ELLKBase, 2002; Freeman, 1998; Krashen 1981, 1985).  

Brain-based research is confirming what experienced language teachers already know 

about how people learn and acquire language.  “What the research adds, at this point, is a partial 

understanding of why certain procedures or strategies work” (Wolfe, 2001, p. V).  The research 

on the brain provides promising links to what language teachers may do to engage their students 

in learning.  Through the findings of brain-based research, language teachers are now more 

effectively enabled to design classroom instruction that coincides with how their students learn 

(English for the Children, 1998; ELLKBase, 2002; Freeman, 1998; Krashen 1981, 1985; Nevin, 

1993; Short, 1998; Thomas & Collier, 2001; Wolfe, 2001).  This comprehensive paper explores 

brain research, including new knowledge about how the brain processes language.  Second, how 

151

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

classroom instruction relates to language acquisition is examined.  Finally, two educational 

models that emerged from the study of cognition, SDAIE and CALLA, are closely examined. 

The methodologies are each examined for use with LEP students, in order to help these students 

succeed academically.       

Brain Research

 

Scholars have been studying the anatomy of the brain for over three thousand years 

(Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 2001).  For over a century, neuroscientists have tried to understand how 

the human brain learns, stores, and processes information.  This task has been rather difficult 

because there are no animals that have symbol systems as rich as human's spoken language.  For 

a long time, information about how the brain processed language came only from the studying 

effects of disease of the brain, known as neurological disease.  Scientists dissected and studied 

the brains of people who had suffered and died from a neurological; the study of cadavers is 

known as post-mortem research (Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 2001).    

The adult brain weighs about three pounds; it is made up of predominately water (78%); 

the remaining weight is fat (10%); protein (8%), and other materials (4%)  (Jensen, 1998).  The 

brain is about 2% of an adult’s body weight but uses about 20% of the energy of the body.  It 

contains about 100 billion nerve cells (or neurons) and about 1 trillion supporting cells, known as 

glia.  These neurons are the only cells in the body that process information.  The nerve cells of 

the brain make about one thousand trillion synaptic contact points with each other.  These 

neurons pass information at a speed of up to 200 miles an hour.  A single neuron can receive 

152

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

thousands of signals from other neuronal sources although they do not make physical contact 

with one another.  The neurons send and receive chemical messages over the synaptic space. 

They are constantly firing electrical and chemical energy, gaining strength through usage.  With a 

few exceptions, new neurons do not grow, however new connections between neurons are 

always forming.  It is within these connections in the brain that contributes to learning and 

memory (Christison, 1999; Cogito: Brain and Mind; Genesee, 2000; Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 2001).

Most   neuroscientists   believe   that   at   birth   the   human   brain   has   all   the 
neurons   it   will   ever   have   …   Some  connections   that   control   automatic 
functions   are   in   place   by   birth   such   as   breathing.     However,   mental 
circuitry results from experiences that greet the newborn and continue to 
throughout their life.  (Classroom Compass, 2000, p. 1)

In the past decade, exciting new brain imaging techniques have allowed researchers to 

view the brains of live people.  Using positron emission tomography (PET), special analyses of 

electroencephalograms (EEG), functional magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), 

magnetoencephalography, and other tools, researchers can now view the brain in real time. 

Linguists and neuroscientists use these imaging techniques to view the brains of people while 

they process language.  The researcher instructs the human subjects to do a language task while 

their brains are being imaged by these technological advances borrowed from the field of 

medicine (Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 2001).  

Neuroscientists long ago mapped the brain, and sophisticated imaging has increased 

knowledge of how each section of brain operates.  The brain is composed of four areas, called 

lobes, and each has specific functions.  Neuroscientists agree that the frontal lobe, located behind 

the forehead, is involved in the most sophisticated, integrated brain functions (Jensen, 1998; 

153

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Wolfe 2001).  The primary responsibilities of the frontal lobe include the following: thinking, 

judgment, creativity, conceptualizing, problem solving, and planning skills.  The parietal lobe is 

in the top back of the brain; sensory and language functions are found there.  The occipital lobe 

is located in the middle back of the brain and is responsible for vision.  The temporal lobes are 

located on the left and right sides of the brain; these areas are responsible for hearing, memory, 

meaning, and language.  Experts believe that there is some functional overlap in the lobes. 

Usually, several different areas of the brain are simultaneously engaged in an activity.  For 

example, thirty areas of the outer surface of the brain are involved in vision alone (D’Arcangelo, 

1998; Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 2001). 

The brain has two nearly identical halves: the left and the right hemispheres. 

Neuroscientists have discovered that there are small differences in the sizes of some regions in 

the two hemispheres.  The hemispheres connect via nerve fibers in a structure called the corpus 

callosum.  The hemisphercity theory attributes particular preferences and learning styles to one 

side of the brain.  This information comes from adults and children suffering brain injuries due to 

catastrophic events.  Language is typically a left hemisphere activity whereas art and music are 

typically located in the right hemisphere.  The left hemisphere appears to be responsible for both 

sign language and spoken language.  The left-brain is involved with processing words, numerals, 

lists, and providing logic, analyses and order; the right brain is involved with rhythm, color, 

daydreaming, imagination, space, and the ability to move through dimensions (Davies, 1996). 

By studying the different times and areas of brain growth, language teachers can have a better 

understanding of how language is developed, tailor the academic content, and develop their 

154

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

students’ skills to enhance the curriculum, and provide an enriched, brain-friendly classroom 

environment.  

The Brain and Language Acquisition

“Learning is a process that establishes new connections among networks and the new 

skills or knowledge that are learned" (Genesee, 2000, p. 3).  The brain plays a vital role in 

learning a language.  How the brain works has a significant impact on what kinds of learning 

activities are most effective.  Neuroscientists long believed the regions of the brain developed 

according to genetic codes that were predetermined at birth.  Some neuroscientists believe the 

brain begins to form its learning patterns, such as learning a language, at birth.  Today, scientists 

believe the brain is much more malleable than ever thought before (Jensen, 1998).  They now 

believe that the regions of the brain are not fixed at birth, but are shaped by experiences and 

learning.  As the individual responds and adapts to their environment, the brain also adapts itself 

to the learning environment (Jensen, 1998).  Scientific research has indicated that early in a 

child's life, neural connections form as he/she learns.  At what age these circuits are completed is 

uncertain (Genesee, 2000; Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 2001).  

A newborn's brain makes connections at an incredible pace as the child 
absorbs   its   environment.   The   richer   the   environment,   the   greater   the 
number of interconnections that are made, and learning takes place faster 
and   with   greater   meaning.    As   the   child   grows,   the   brain   selectively 
strengthens and prunes connections based on experience.   Although this 
process continues throughout our lives, it seems to be most pronounced 
between the ages of 2 and 11, as different development areas emerge and 
taper off.  (Sousa, 1998, p.1) 

155

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Neurosurgeons have discovered that language processing is not located solely in the left 

hemisphere of the human brain.  In the normal brain, in fact, the two hemispheres work together 

during speech.  When people have had their brain midline severed, through the corpus callosum, 

they stopped communicating.  The language system connects to other intellectual and motor 

systems, as well as mechanisms required for speech.  These areas of the brain require motivation 

to become aroused and activated.  Neurological imaging studies have provided strong evidence 

that the frontal lobes and structures deep in the brain become active during many language tasks. 

Written language connects to the areas of the brain that are part of the visual cortex, and sign 

language may recruit the areas of the brain that are related spatial ability; spatial ability allows 

the brain to locate objects in space (Classroom Compass, 2000; Genesee, 2000; Wolfe, 2001).

Language acquisition and learning are two separate processes.  Language acquisition is a 

developmental type of learning processed in the auditory-temporal cortex located in the left 

hemisphere.  Language acquisition is a complex system that consists of a special kind of code (or 

a set of symbols) that are connected to words and phrases and is a natural phenomenon that 

occurs without any interventions (Jensen, 1998).  The language pattern formed in an infant's 

brain will continue to remain for a lifetime unless something intervenes to change that pattern 

(Jensen, 1998).  Experts believe that children discover the system of language from a small, 

unsystematic amount of data and do not require instruction in how to acquire language (Krashen, 

1981, 1985).     

Language acquisitioning is the unconscious process that occurs when the infant or novice 

hears real conversation; learning is the act of acquiring formal knowledge about the language 

156

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

(Krashen, 1981).  Linguist Stephen Krashen (1981) defined language acquisitioning in Second 

Language Acquisition and Second Language Learning: 

Language  acquisition  is   very   similar   to   the   process   children   use   in 
acquiring first and second languages.  It requires meaningful interaction in 
the   target   language--natural   communication--in   which   speakers   are 
concerned not with the form of their utterances but with the messages they 
are conveying and understanding.  Error correction and explicit teaching 
of rules are not relevant to language acquisition but caretakers and native 
speakers can modify their utterances addressed to acquirers to help them 
understand, and these modifications are thought to help the acquisition 
process.   It has been hypothesized that there is a fairly stable order of 
acquisition of structures in language acquisition, that is, one can see clear 
similarities across acquirers as to which structures tend to be acquired 
early and which tend to be acquired late.  (pp. 1-2) 

Linguistic research is divisible into first and second language learning.  A student’s 

primary language (L1) is the language one has developed from birth and the language that was 

closely intertwined with the development of cognition.  Learning a second language (L2) is a 

lengthy, highly idiosyncratic, and difficult process which language acquisition theorists suggest 

can take up to seven or more years for a student to develop proficiency, depending on his/her age 

(Classroom Compass, 2000; D’Arcangelo, 1998; Jensen, 1998: Krashen, 1981; 1985).  

The best time to master a new language is when one is younger; their 
neural connections are strong and not completely filled.  If a person waited 
until they are 18 or 30, learning a new language is possible, but it becomes 
more   difficult   because   the   system   governing   this   have   been   used   for 
something else.  (D’Arcangelo, 1998, p. 4) 

A child has twice as many neurons as adults.  Therefore the ideal time for learning a 

second language is during the first eight to ten years of development because it is during that 

period that neural growth is so high (D’Arcangelo, 1998; Krashen, 1981, 1985).  After that, 

157

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

neural branches (dendrites) that have not connected will eventually die off.  A newborn's neural 

cortex grows at a rapid rate, then reaches a peak during adolescence, and then slowly declines. 

“It is believed the brain interacts together as a whole brain and that learning begins when 

connections are made within the brain and between the brain and the outside world" (Cognito: 

Brain and Mind, 2002, p. 1).  When one is learning, the neurons communicate using chemicals 

called neurotransmitters.  These connections occur when children are stimulated through 

meaningful experiences such as learning a new language.  Therefore, a solid educational 

experience during this period of life is more critical than ever thought before.   

These so-called "windows of opportunity" represent critical periods when 
the brain demands certain types of input to create or consolidate neural 
networks,   especially   for   acquiring   language,   emotional   control,   and 
learning to play music.   Certainly, one can learn new information and 
skills at any age.  But what the child learned during that window period 
will strongly influence what is learned after the window closes.  (Sousa, 
1998, p.1) 

As we age, the development of neural connections can modify our capacity to learn new 

concepts, such as a new language.  Once, researchers believed that only young brains were 

plastic.  They thought that the dendrites developed in the first few years of childhood and were 

fixed and difficult to change.  An enormous amount of animal and human research in the past 

two decades, however, confirms that the brain retains some of its plasticity throughout life. 

Evidence has shown that older brains can adapt in order to overcome a number of barriers, such 

as suffering a stroke.  Language processing and motor function can return after this type of event. 

Neuroscientist Marian Diamond stated in an interview, “If we continue to learn and enrich our 

158

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

minds, we continue to grow dendrites, and if we stop we lose them with age" (D’Arcangelo, 

1998, p. 4).  In 1993, researchers Green, Black, and Wallace studied rats’ brains and 

demonstrated enhanced synaptic growth due to a complex environment in both young and older 

rats.  In 1995, Karni and her colleagues demonstrated an expansion in cortical involvement 

during the performance of motor tasks.  The cerebral cortex was altered even in adult brains in 

response to an enriched environment or complex learning experiences (Genesee, 2000, p. 2). 

The longer continuous meaningful learning occurs in life, the longer the brain will make the 

neural connections necessary for growth.  Therefore, research on the brain and language 

indicates that during the early years it is critical for teachers to help establish meaningful 

associations between their students and learning opportunities.  By examining research data from 

the field of neuroscience and linguistics, language teachers can have a better understanding of 

how language is developed.  The ESL teacher may tailor the academic content to help develop 

their student's skills most efficiently.  Through curriculum enhancement, they may provide an 

enriched, brain-friendly classroom environment.  Classroom instruction and language acquisition 

is explored next. 

Classroom Instruction and Language Acquisition

Scientific research on the brain has transformed and enhanced how language instruction 

is delivered in classrooms across the globe (Bueno, 1999; Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 2001). 

Instructional models have transitioned from the authoritative teacher-centered environment of the 

first half of the twentieth century to the “humanistic" classroom and learner-centered mode of 

159

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

instruction that predominated the 1960s.  In the 1970s and 1980s, language classrooms 

transformed again with the implementation new approaches and techniques to assist with 

learning English as a Second Language.  These approaches include the Communicative 

Approach, the Total Physical Response (TPR), cooperative learning, and integrated learning 

(Bueno, 1999; Garvin, 1996; Hancock, 1994; Krashen, 1981, 1985; Mc Laughlin, 1995; 

Peterson, 2002).   

The Communicative Approach is a language instructional methodology that emphasizes 

the importance of interpersonal relationships to language learning and focused on the “whole” 

student; it includes subjects such as music, physical activity, and art.  The Communicative 

Approach uses the stages of second language acquisition, comprehensible input, low affective 

filter, and authentic activities and assessments.  In 1981, Stephen Krashen defined 

comprehensible input in his Monitor Model of Second Language Acquisition.  According to 

Krashen, language learners acquire second language through exposure to language samples that 

contain mostly familiar forms and a few novel expressions.  The familiar forms should resemble 

"motherese" forms, which is a special form of language that caregivers use with their children as 

they develop language.  In the school setting, language teachers’ speak at a slower rate, and use 

clear articulation, longer pauses, paraphrases, and gestures; they also use objects or pictures 

frequently (Bueno, 1999).  Affective filter, a term coined by Krashen, refers to how emotions, 

such as motivation, self-confidence, self-image, and anxiety, influence learning.  Students will 

learn when they are motivated, their confidence and self-image are strong, and their anxiety 

remains low (Bueno, 1999; Krashen, 1981).  Learning activities and assessments are authentic 

when students use language to interpret and express real world settings.  To be considered an 

160

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

authentic activity or an assessment, students must apply real-world applications of skills and 

acquire meaningful knowledge that goes beyond an assessment activity (Bueno, 1999; Garvin, 

1996; Hancock, 1994; Krashen, 1981, 1985; Mc Laughlin, 1995; Peterson, 2002). 

Total Physical Response (TPR) is another instructional methodology teachers use to teach 

language.  James Asher (2002) created Total Physical Response in 1974; he applied brain 

research to explain natural language acquisition.  “TPR is based on the premise that the human 

brain has a biological program for acquiring any natural language on earth - including the sign 

language of the deaf.”  Total Physical Response differs from other instructional techniques in that 

is involved the use of physical actions.  In TPR, language teachers employ kinesthetic-sensory 

activities to stress “the full development of listening comprehension before encouraging any 

active oral participation” (Bueno, 1999, p. 1).  Total Physical Response continues to be one of 

the most popular methods of delivering language instruction in today’s language classrooms 

(Asher, 2002; Bueno, 1999). 

Cooperative learning involves sharing knowledge within a group by collaboratively 

working together.  Each person has a specific role in a group-project: researcher, recorder, artist, 

and/or presenter.  By working cooperatively in small heterogeneous groups on a specific task, 

students can negotiate the means to construct an outcome.  This allows them to exchange 

information, knowledge, and experience.  In return, they will make connections themselves with 

the content and the language.  Using cooperative learning and center-based activities, teachers 

can address the various learning styles, as well as the English language levels, of their students 

(Caine & Caine, 1994, 1997; D’Arcangelo, 2000).

161

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Integrated (also termed interdisciplinary or thematic) learning occurs when teachers 

introduce a topic thematically and intertwine two or more subjects to make connections to 

learning more meaningful.  When learning is orchestrated throughout the curriculum, students 

become fully engaged, and in return, they enjoy learning and take ownership of it.  Students are 

taught to link content and language learning in a meaningful way, which helps to develop their 

critical thinking skills.  These skills are also needed for other content subjects, so it improves 

performance "across the board" (Caine & Caine, 1994, 1997; D’Arcangelo, 2000).  

In the 1990s, classroom instruction was again transformed with the findings of Dr. 

Howard Gardner, a cognitive psychologist who developed a theory of Multiple Intelligences (MI) 

(1993, 1995).  Gardner theorized that human cognitive competence was pluralistic, rather than 

unitary, in design.  Human beings, according to Gardner, possess multiple intelligences in 

varying amounts and each individual has a different intellectual composition.  These 

intelligences are located in different areas of the brain and can work either independently or 

together.  Gardner proposed a schema of eight types of intelligence, while suggesting there are 

probably many others that educators have not yet been able to decipher.  

A summary of Gardner's eight types of intelligence follows: 

1) Linguistic intelligence is the ability to use language effectively both orally 
and written.
2) Logical/mathematical intelligence is the ability to use numbers effectively 
and reason well. 
3) Visual/spatial intelligence is the ability to recognize form, space, color, 
lines, and shapes to graphically represent visual and spatial ideas.
4) Bodily/kinesthetic intelligence is the ability to use the body to express ideas 
and feelings and to solve problems. 
5) Musical intelligence is the ability to recognize rhythm, pitch, and melody.

162

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

6)   Naturalist   intelligence   is   the   ability   to   recognize   and   classify   plants, 
minerals, and animals. 
7)   Interpersonal   intelligence   is   the   ability   to   understand   another   person's 
feelings, motivations, and intentions and to respond effectively.
8)   Intrapersonal   intelligence   is   the   ability   to   know   about   and   understand 
oneself   and   recognize   one's   similarities   to   and   differences   from   others. 
(Christison, 1998, 1999; Davies, 1996; ELLKBase, 2002)   

The theory of Multiple Intelligences continues to be widely accepted by educators; it is 

affecting instructional delivery throughout the world.  Since the inception of Gardner’s MI 

theory, teachers have become more receptive of differentiated learning.  “In a differentiated 

classroom, teachers begin where students are, not the front of a curriculum guide.  They accept 

and build upon the premise that learners differ in important ways” (Tomlinson, 1999, p. 1).  In 

addition, teachers are better equipped to work with their students, for they bring with them an 

appreciation for individual strengths, unique learning styles, and different learning potentials 

(Christison, 1998, 1999; Davies, 1996; ELLKBase, 2002; Tomlinson, 1999).  

Educators, Geoffrey and Renate Caine (1994, 1997) have also studied brain-based 

research and arrived at twelve principles of brain-based learning that are based on the notion that 

all people are driven to search for meaning in life.  These principles were derived from an 

exploration of many disciplines and are viewed as a pedagogical framework for teaching.  The 

principles are: 

1. The brain is a complex adaptive system. 
2. The brain is a social brain. 
3. The search for meaning is innate. 
4. The search for meaning occurs through patterning. 
5. Emotions are critical to patterning. 
6. Every brain simultaneously perceives and creates parts and wholes. 
7. Learning involves both focused attention and peripheral attention. 
8. Learning always involves conscious and unconscious processes. 

163

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

9. We have at least two ways of organizing memory. 
10. Learning is developmental. 
11. Complex learning is enhanced by challenge and inhibited by threat. 
12. Every brain is uniquely organized. (p.28)
  

The Caines believe that each principle represents an aspect of learning based upon brain-based 

research.  These principles were designed to enhance the learning environment.  Teachers who 

have used their principles in instruction no longer see their students as a “blank slate, and have a 

new appreciation of the fact that the body, brain, and mind are a dynamic unity” (p. 27).  

According to the Caines (1997), teachers tend to fall into one of three categories.  The 

first is the traditional, old school, teacher-centered, or "stand and deliver" approach.  The second 

approach is the middle ground, where the teacher is in charge but creates a rich learning 

environment, with more complex learning experiences, for their students.  And the third 

approach involves a complex, interactive, student-centered classroom environment.  It is in this 

student-centered environment that second language learners tend to flourish and to develop and 

retain their new language most readily.  In an interactive student-centered classroom, the teacher 

has removed classroom threats and allowed the student's mind to be calm yet attentive (Krashen 

1981, 1985). 

For complex learning to occur, Caine and Caine have identified three conditions: 

1. An optimal state of mind that is called relaxed alertness, consisting of a 
low threat and high challenge. 
2. The orchestrated immersion of the learner in multiple, complex, 
authentic experience. 
3. The regular active processing experience as the basis for the making 
meaning.  (p. 32)

  

164

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Emotions may impede students’ learning (Caine & Caine, 1997; Jensen, 1998; Wolfe, 

2000).  

N

euroscientists believe emotions are mediated through a complex mix of thoughts, 

perceptions, feelings, and reasoning.  These aspects are interwoven and can affect how a student 

learns.  When people are exposed to constant threat or early trauma, high levels of the 

neurotransmitters serotonin and noradrenalin are released (Jensen, 1998).  If fear or stress is 

constant, the brain’s normal circuits can be altered; therefore, a person’s physical and emotional 

well being is closely linked to the ability to think and to learn effectively (Jensen, 1998; Krashen, 

1981, 1985; Wolfe, 2000).  The affective filter is a screen of emotion that blocks language 

acquisition or learning as it keeps the users from being too self-conscious or too embarrassed to 

take risks.  Krashen (1985) stressed that optimal input or learning occurs when the affective filter 

is low.  When the classroom atmosphere exhibits threatening or high tones, students will shut 

down and not be willing to take risks.  It is only when the atmosphere is “threat” free or (at least) 

low threat that students begin to take risks (Bueno, 1999; Jensen; 1998; Krashen, 1981, 1985). 

Teachers may use the understanding how students’ emotions play a critical role in their 

learning to drive the curriculum.  It is most important to realize that emotions can be a hindrance 

in learning or can be an aide, depending on how the teacher uses them.  If students experience a 

negative emotion when under threat, the research indicates that the brain will downshift or (at 

least) slow down.  “When threatened, the second language learner becomes less flexible and will 

revert back to a more routine behavior and will have difficulty processing new information" 

(Christison, 1999, p. 1).  When teachers’ instruction captivates students’ emotions in a positive 

way such as love, excitement, enthusiasm, and joy, they enhance the ability of the cerebral cortex 

to process information and create meaningful connections.  Depending upon how students "feel" 

165

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

about a learning situation determines the amount of attention they will devote to it.  Their 

emotions interact with reason to support or inhibit learning.  Students, for example, must feel 

physically safe and emotionally secure in their schools and classrooms before they can focus on 

the curriculum.  To aid in building an emotionally secure environment, teachers must provide 

outlets for their students' emotions through discussions, singing, sharing, writing, music, or even 

drawing.  Teachers should do whatever it takes to get their students' emotions out in the open so 

they do not suppress them (Jensen, 1998).  When teachers promote emotional security in their 

classroom, they are establishing a positive climate that encourages students to take appropriate 

risks that enhance the learning experience.

“Teachers influence learning everyday by designing the physical and emotional 

environment" (Jensen, 1998, p. 3).  Students’ learning is influenced not only by their emotions 

but also through social interactions because the brain is social by nature.  There is a human need 

to build realistic, intimate relationships with others in the environment; this need has evolved 

over thousands of years (Caine & Caine, 1994, 1997; Krashen 1981, 1985).  Social interaction is 

also emotionally stimulating and supports the learning process.  According to the Caines (1997), 

teachers must immerse learners in complex, interactive experiences that are both rich and real. 

An excellent example is illustrated in which the students are immersed in a foreign language 

(English) and culture (American) in order to help them learn.    

Through research, teachers are discovering how the brain makes new neural connections 

when it gets actively involved in interesting and challenging situations.  Classrooms should be 

busy, interactive environments where students and their teachers are learning from one another. 

In an interactive classroom teachers do not hesitate to have their students physically stand up, 

166

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

move around, and have peer interactions.  An interactive, task-centered classroom is critical to 

students’ learning process because it helps maintain students’ focus while enhancing their sense 

of meaning.  Often this effective model of instruction can be found in most elementary 

classrooms; however, in many secondary and college classrooms, students sit passively for long 

period with little sensory stimulation, listening primarily to their teachers lecture (Caine & 

Caine, 1997).  

One of the most ineffective forms of instructional delivery for students, especially for 

LEP students, is traditional lecturing.  When teachers lecture, most often their students left-brains 

begin to send sabotaging messages such as "How is this relevant to my life?”  "How will I ever 

use this information?" and/or "Does this teacher know what he/she is doing?”  For many LEP 

students, their critical left-brains may be telling them to ignore their teacher because their brains 

have not been coded for the new language.  In other words, their brains may be telling them that 

there is no such language as the one the teacher is using.  Often, to LEP students, it sounds like 

their teacher is speaking like the teacher from Charlie Brown, “Blah, blah, blah.”  After all, the 

teacher is the only person in the room who is trying to challenge what the student knows to be 

true.  Therefore, in the students’ brains, whatever data the teacher is presenting is irrelevant to the 

learner because their brains fail to store the information in their long-term memory and will not 

be able to retrieve the data for later use.  “Our marvelous brain remembers everything, the 

problem we have is ineffective recall" (Davies, 1996, p. 5).  That is why after extended periods 

of instruction and practice, students later return to the class and act as if they have never heard 

the material before (Davies, 1996).  

167

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Researchers, such as the Caines, recommend a relaxed learning environment that offers 

numerous options for individual learning.  In the student-centered classroom, the teacher is the 

facilitator of learning, who guides their students learning by design.  Teachers create 

interdisciplinary, thematic lessons and then engage their students through an array of student-

centered, versatile activities.  These activities speak to their students’ interests, thus creating an 

interest in learning (Caine & Caine, 1994).  According to Gerald Edelman (1992), chairman of 

the Department of Neurobiology at Scripps Research Institute, students learn best when they 

interact continuously in an environment that provides many sensory, cultural, and problem 

layers.  His ideas suggest that students have a natural inclination to learn, understand, and grow. 

Surround the students with a variety of instructional opportunities and they will make the 

connections for learning.  

Both the Caines' and Edelman’s learning theories follow the model of Vygotsky’s social 

cognition learning model.  Lev Semenovich

 

Vygotsky, an educational theorist and behaviorist 

(1896-1934), suggested that culture is the primary determinant of individual development. 

Through culture, children learn language and acquire much of the content of their thinking.  The 

familial culture of LEP students dictated what and how they thought within their native 

homeland, but now they must learn to adjust to their new surroundings and culture (Vygotsky 

and Social Cognition, 1998).  Through communication with their peers, students learn a rich 

body of knowledge that exists in the culture (Caine & Caine, 1994, 1997; D’Arcangelo, 2000). 

The social cognition-learning model has heavily influenced education today.  The teacher 

becomes a facilitator of their students’ learning.  The teacher sets up scenarios that students 

168

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

perform with others.  The students accomplish and perform tasks they may never have completed 

on their own (Vygotsky and Social Cognition, 1998).

The best way help LEP students to transition students from one culture to another is 

through peer interaction in cooperative student centers.  These cooperative centers involve LEP 

students in a variety of activities involving groups of students creating and solving specific tasks 

together.  Activities may include role-playing, cooperative learning, and story telling.  The 

lessons allow students to be focused for short periods of time allowing them to input the 

information, reflect upon it, and then process the new information learned.  These centers need to 

be hands-on and allow the students to investigate new concepts and dialogue each other; the LEP 

students will gain new knowledge and have immediate feedback from their peers.  The students 

are provided options and must learn to take responsibility and prioritize.  By using cooperative 

learning and center-based activities, teachers can address the various learning styles and the 

English language development of their LEP students (Caine & Caine, 1994, 1997; D’Arcangelo, 

2000; ELLKBase, 2002).  Limited English proficient students can learn to excel in a variety of 

ways when the classroom teacher offers an ample number of learning opportunities. 

When learning is orchestrated throughout the curriculum, students will become fully 

engaged, and in return, they will enjoy learning and take ownership of it.  Implementing 

interdisciplinary learning (thematic) is also an effective way to engage students.  These students 

are taught to link content and language learning in a meaningful way, which helps to develop 

their critical thinking skills.  By working cooperatively in small heterogeneous groups on a 

specific task, LEP students can negotiate the means to construct an outcome.  This activity 

allows students to exchange information, knowledge, and experience.  In return, they will make 

169

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

connections themselves with the content and the language.  Educators need to help students have 

appropriate experiences and capitalize on those experiences.  These activities will help to build 

oral language development as well as increase the vocabulary needed to build comprehension 

(Bower, 1998).

Brain-based research has provided evidence that individuals have different learning 

styles, which affects their comprehension.  Some children learn through problem solving 

experiences, which they share with another student or the teacher.  Others learn kinesthetically, 

by using their sense of feel.  Educators must take advantage of the brain's ability to parallel 

process.  Students must have a personal and meaningful challenge to gain new knowledge.  Such 

challenges stimulate a student's mind to the desired state of alertness.  In order for a student to 

gain insight about a problem, there must be intensive analysis of the different ways to approach 

it.  This is what is known as the "active processing of experience" (Jensen, 1998).  Student 

learning can be enhanced when teachers realize that how they deliver instruction can impede or 

improve their students’ learning.  It is imperative that teachers examine how they deliver 

instruction because LEP students process and retain information differently.  They must 

determine whether they will require students to memorize facts and listen to lectures or engage in 

meaningful exercises.  Further, they must question whether the information being presented is 

meaningful to the student.  When LEP students are asked to merely memorize facts, it will not 

lead to constructive learning.  They will just be regurgitating information and not make a 

meaningful connection.  Evidence from neuroscience has shown that when students are asked to 

learn facts and skills in isolation, the brain cannot make the necessary connections.  If the lessons 

are meaningful, students will learn quicker and retain the information longer (Christison, 1999). 

170

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Teachers are learning more about how students store and recall information in their long-

term memory.  The research has indicated that students’ experiences may influence new learning. 

Memory acts like a filter that helps students to focus on those things that have relevant meaning 

and discard irrelevant thoughts.  Meaning has a tremendous impact on what information and/or 

skills will be learned and stored.  If students do not develop a profound connection by the end of 

a learning episode, there is little likelihood that much information will be recalled.  To help 

students find meaning, today's curriculum must contain connections to their experiences, not just 

their teachers.   

An example of how memory functions is evident when LEP students learn their new 

language.  The sounds (phonemes) are unfamiliar to their brains and therefore their brains are not 

able to register the connections to words.  If the brain hears an unfamiliar sound or word, it will 

search other avenues such as auditory, visual, spatial, or motor sources to aid in the detection for 

meaning.  It registers as “an undifferentiated neural activity”; the learner must “retrain” their 

brain to recognize these sounds (Genesee, 2000, p. 2).  If all sources do not recognize the sound 

or the word, the input will not be comprehensible and the sounds or words to be deciphered 

become useless noise or jargon, and therefore meaningless.  Only through continual exposure 

over time does the brain begin to make sense of the sounds and words.  Language teachers 

successfully aid in this process by extending phonemes and exaggerating them until their 

students are able to make the neural connections and learn the new sounds (Talukder, 2000).  By 

doing so, the teacher is naturally exercising their students’ neural activity.  After this continual 

exposure to the new sounds, the brain will be able to decipher among the new sounds.  By 

working together to form connections, the neurons form a type of network, which will allow one 

171

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

to comprehend the sounds, the words, and the phrases (Talukder, 2000).  An analogy for this 

process is a Polaroid picture that is fuzzy when the photo is first pulled out of the camera and 

then has greater definition when it is fully developed.    

Knowledge of the manner, which the brain processes and stores memory, may assist 

teachers with their lesson planning and their presentations (Jensen, 1998).  There are four types 

of memory: procedural, episodic, semantic, and sensory.  Procedural memory occurs after 

repeated action; it typically deals with routine activities, such as brushing teeth.  Episodic 

memory is emotionally charged, either positively or negatively.  Teachers may use positive 

episodic memory to aid their students in recalling important information, building on their prior 

knowledge, and acting upon it (Davies, 1996; Jensen, 1998).  

Semantic memory, or rote memory, is often used in the classroom to recall facts.  The 

right side of the brain is thought to be virtually non-verbal or mute, and non-critical; however, it 

is pattern seeking.  Although this side of the brain is mute, and does not allow for spoken 

language, it will try to communicate by whispering softly and using body language such as 

gestures.  When the pattern-seeking part of the brain finds cause-and-effect relationships, they 

are likely to be stored in the long-term memory.  The implication for teaching is that assertions 

by the instructor are not enough; the student's brain will insist that each assertion is proved 

(Davies, 1996; Jensen, 1998). 

 Sensory memory, which is in the right part of the brain, is automatic.  This allows one to 

process short-term and long-term memory.  Because every person has a neural history, teachers 

draw from past experiences to grab students’ attention and build understanding.  If a personal 

connection is made to the learning experience, it will stimulate a response, which can generate a 

172

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

new real life experience.  According to Davies (1996), “We often remember information when it 

is characterized by: sensory associations, emotional context, intense associations, necessities for 

survival, personal importance, or repetition"(p. 5).  Bringing two sources of stimulus together, 

such as using of pictures and music, increases the overall amount of brain activity and creates 

more neural connections; this ultimately assists with learning and language acquisition.  When 

these neural connections are formed, memories are created.  If a teacher increases the number, 

and the variety of the connections, there is an increased chance of retention and later recall. 

Recall is also greater for information that is presented first or last in a session; this is known as 

the "primacy effect" and the "recency effect."  In order to retain the information necessary, the 

brain needs to rehearse the information using a variety of repetitive actions such as learning 

through rhyming, poetry, music, and movement.  A teacher can also use word chunking to 

convey the information.  This process allows students to make connections to concepts to which 

they are already familiar (Christison, 1999; Davies, 1996; Jensen, 1998; Sprenger 1999).

Schemas are interpretive frames that teachers use to help their students make sense of 

information by relating it to previous experiences.  By providing students with a simple graphic 

organizer or a visual aid that displays the chunks of information to be learned, the students have 

a framework, which they can use to approach the information.  Schemas also help to clarify 

instructional goals and clear up any misconceptions.  A story map is one example of a graphic 

organizer that breaks down the elements of a narrative into chunks of texts, so that the students 

can organize and comprehend the events therein.  It also illustrates what the students are 

responsible for learning.  Using a story map for the study of literature helps to make the learning 

interesting and increases later recall. 

173

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

To inspire effective learning, a teacher should also include music.  Music is often linked 

to emotions in the brain, and playing it in the classroom can trigger pleasurable memories.  “The 

reason music is so important to the learning environment is that is actually corresponds to and 

affects our physiological conditions” (Davies, 1996, p. 3).  With music, students develop spatial 

reasoning which they can use for mathematical skills (Classrooms Compass, 2000; Davies, 

1996).  It is probably the most inexpensive adaptation that can be easily applied in the classroom 

environment.  Teachers can use classical music, which is universal and has no lyrics to confuse 

LEP students.  Music may be employed during "quiet time," in which students quietly read a 

book or relax without talking to each other.  This quiet period allows time for neural connections 

that were made during learning to be processed (Davies, 1996; Jensen, 1998).  

An effective teacher will use knowledge of brain activity to focus on wholes to parts and 

parts to wholes resulting in a balanced approach.  One benefit of a balanced approach to 

language it that is allows students to make real world connections.  It uses the natural language 

that students use in social interaction.  Balanced approach instruction includes the integration of 

listening, speaking, reading, and writing.  Phonics and spelling are each integrated meaningfully 

into the student’s written language, allowing them to express their thoughts.  Using rich language 

activities allows students to recall events they have learned both inside and outside of the 

classroom (Christison, 1997).

Brain research has lead to changes not only in teacher presentation, but also in student 

assessment.  Assessment effects student learning because students learn differently, assessments 

must take place in a variety of ways.  It is particularly important to use multiple modes of 

assessment that will allow students to show their strengths and perform optimally.  The core of 

174

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Gardner's MI theory and Caines’ principles are opposed to the dated use of formalized, 

standardized testing.  Many testing professionals currently have confidence in authentic 

assessment, which emphasizes viewing students' knowledge from different perspectives so as to 

provide a complete picture of students' abilities, efforts, and progress during the learning process. 

Brain-based research has indicated that students need to have a diverse system of assessments 

that offer a variety of ways for students to express what they know.  Assessments can be process-

based, individualized-based, contextualized-based, performance-based, and ongoing-based type. 

The assessment may include paper-and-pencil tests, portfolios, journals/logs, projects, exhibits, 

performances, and displays.  Students need comments from teachers, their parents, and other 

students to help reinforce their training (Christison, 1997; D’Arcangelo, 1998). 

Middle and high school LEP students are entering U. S. public schools and are being 

placed in English-only general education (mainstream) classrooms with minimal language 

support.  For those school districts that have language assistance programs, some of their LEP 

parents are opting to “waiver” their children out of bilingual and/or ESL services (KUSD, 2003). 

If LEP students are placed in mainstream classes, their teachers will need additional professional 

development in order to effectively deal with them.  Two highly effective language instructional 

approaches that can aid general education teachers in improving the linguistic and cognitive 

academic skills of their LEP students in the mainstreamed classroom are known as Specially 

Designed Academic Instruction in English (SDAIE) and Cognitive Academic Language Learning 

Approach (CALLA) (ELLKBase, 2002; Gulack & Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 2000).

175

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Specially Designed Academic Instruction in English 

SDAIE is the acronym for Specially Designed Academic Instruction in English, and is 

based upon the theoretical work of linguistic theorists Stephen Krashen and Jim Cummins.  

Their 

development of the “Contextual Interaction Theory” and the hypotheses therein provides the 

cornerstones for SDAIE methodology and program design.  SDAIE equips mainstream teachers 

with neuroscience researched English language development strategies to effectively teach their 

LEP students (Gulack & Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 2000).  SDAIE incorporates Vygotsky’s Zone 

of Proximal Development, which is that level that is just above the students’ language abilities, 

into classroom discussion.  SDAIE was not originally designed for beginning level LEP students, 

but for those LEP students who had been transitioned into the mainstreamed classrooms, and 

who had reached intermediate fluency in English.  These LEP students are usually orally 

proficient in English, but are reading and writing below grade level (ELLKBase, 2002; Gulack & 

Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 2000).  SDAIE provides teachers with special techniques and strategies 

that were designed to assist them in guiding their LEP students in both language acquisition and 

subject matter content (ELLKBase, 2002; Gulack & Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 2000).

The two major components of SDAIE methodologies include the comprehensible second 

language input and a supportive affective environment (Gulack & Silverstein, 1997).  Although 

SDAIE uses ESL instruction, it functions in a different manner.  SDAIE does not primarily focus 

on language development, rather, its focus is on academic content comprehension, and English is 

learned through this process.  SDAIE is often referred to as "sheltered instruction" because it is 

by sheltering students’ language development that instructors provide some “protection” from the 

176

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

awesome prospect of learning a new language.  The analogy often used for “sheltered” is one of 

an umbrella; an umbrella protects one from a storm.  SDAIE strategies provide LEP students an 

extended opportunity to progress academically as they acquire the English skills necessary 

(Gulack & Silverstein, 1997).  

SDAIE strategies allow LEP students to comprehend the information presented by the 

teacher (comprehensible input) in any format as long as it makes sense to the learner.  It provides 

the context for complex language and a motivation for both the student and the teacher to study 

their textbooks for additional reading and writing activities.  SDAIE strategies used in the 

mainstreamed classrooms to enhance student learning may include: 

1)

realia, which are real objects and materials used as visual clues 
that provide a literal and visual way to describe key words and 
concepts;

2)

manipulatives, such as drawings, posters, graphs, tables, maps, 
props, multimedia presentations, storyboards, and story maps;

3)

visuals,   such   as   study-prints,   textbook   illustrations,   overhead 
projections, paintings, and documents;

4)

graphic organizers, such as matrices, Venn diagrams, and webs;

5)

classroom interactions between all individuals, such as creating 
a   skit   and   acting   it   out,   cooperative   learning,   collaborative 
learning,   and   student-generated   stories   based   on   personal 
experiences; and 

6)

high  thinking  skills   as  previously discussed   in  Metacognitive 
strategies.     (ELLKBase,   2002;   Gulack   &   Silverstein,   1997; 
O'Malley & Chamot, 1990; Rohac, 2000)    

SDAIE strategies are divided into three categories: metacognitive, cognitive, and social-

affective (Rohac, 2000).  Metacognitive strategies are high order critical thinking that, “may 

entail planning for, monitoring, or evaluating, the success of a learning activity” (O'Malley & 

Chamot, 1990, p. 44).  Cognitive strategies are those derived from the knowledge and 

competency structures involved in the learning activities and productions achieved by the 

177

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

learner.  Strategies may include grouping, note-taking, elaboration of prior knowledge, 

summarizing, deduction/induction, imagery, auditory representation, and making inferences 

(O'Malley & Chamot, 1990).  Social-affective strategies are present when students work in 

collaboration with other learners within the learning environment.  Social-affective strategies 

may include questioning for clarification, cooperative learning, and self-talk (ELLKBase, 2002; 

Gulack & Silverstein, 1997; O'Malley & Chamot, 1990).  These activities provide the linguistic 

"hooks" upon which the students can "pin" their new language.

SDAIE teachers continually make allowances for their LEP students’ language levels. 

The teachers continually monitor their instruction including their rate speech, syntax and 

language structure.  Most commonly, reading and writing activities are considered guided 

activities.  Teachers use pre-reading activities with appropriate questioning strategies that relate 

to students’ prior knowledge and experiences.  Teachers provide graphic organizers and other 

tools to help prepare and support students work and promote success (Gulack & Silverstein, 

1997; ELLKBase, 2002; Rohac, 2000).      

Additional instructional approaches imbedded in SDAIE classrooms include 

heterogeneous grouping, hands-on instructional activities, word banks or guarded vocabulary, 

and scaffolding.  Schools often use heterogeneous grouping, in which LEP students are placed in 

classes according to their ability, rather than by grade-level.  This type of grouping allows 

students from several grade-levels to be placed in one class, termed multi-age grouping (Gulack 

& Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 2000).  Hands-on activities are real life experiences that teachers use 

to engage physically their LEP students.  The teacher may use nonverbal cues to help his/her 

students understand what is expected of them.  Word-banks or guarded vocabulary is often 

178

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

referred to as a “catch-all phrase” for a variety of language activities used to build vocabulary 

concepts from the textbooks their students read.  Although the vocabulary may contain 

unfamiliar words, the main purpose of the list is to pre-teach significant ideas and concepts in the 

reading (Gulack & Silverstein, 1997).  This builds familiarity so those students recall being 

introduced to the terms later in their education.  Teachers are conscious of the selection of words 

used, and how they are introduced, practiced and incorporated into all components of their lesson 

plans.  Teachers scan text materials for their content vocabulary and decide which terms might 

cause comprehension problems in instruction and direction (this is termed the support 

vocabulary).  The teacher creates activities, games and other low stress activities to build upon 

this new vocabulary item (Chamot & O’Malley, 1994, 1999; Gulack & Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 

2000).  

Introduced by Vygotsky, scaffolding refers to all of the various strategies that teachers use 

to make English more comprehensible to students.  The teacher’s role in the learning process is 

to provide the support and guidance to help his/her students’ progress (Vygotsky and Social 

Cognition, 1998).  Teachers use scaffolding strategies as a tool in which their LEP students can 

accumulate knowledge; they provide a foundation for continued learning.  Some examples of 

scaffolding are shared reading, book reading, patterned writing, journaling, graphic organizers or 

mapping, learning routines or instruction in and outside the class (Chamot & O’Malley, 1994, 

1999; ELLKBase, 2002;  Freeman & Freeman, 1998; Gulack & Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 2000). 

Scaffolding differs from sequencing because it places a time constraint on students to complete a 

task (e.g. read a certain number of chapters in a book)  (Chamot & O’Malley, 1994,1999; 

ELLKBase, 2002; Freeman & Freeman, 1998; Gulack & Silverstein, 1997; Rohac, 2000). 

179

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Another effective instructional approach educators can implement in their classrooms to help 

their LEP students succeed linguistically and academically is called CALLA, which will be 

examined next.        

Cognitive Academic Language Learning Approach 

CALLA is the acronym for the Cognitive Academic Language Learning Approach. 

CALLA was specially designed for students enrolled in English Speakers of Other Languages 

(ESOL) programs.  The model is a component of Bilingual Education, and it is used in 

traditional ESL classrooms.  CALLA was first developed by Chamot and O’Malley (1994) and is 

based upon their knowledge of research on cognition.  The CALLA model integrates academic 

language development, content area instruction, and explicit learning strategies for both course 

content and English language acquisition.  

The CALLA model was intended to reach out to ESOL students whom research indicated 

were not being sufficiently prepared for grade-level content-area classrooms.  There is a great 

difference between the academic language skills needed by LEP students to function and those 

needed to succeed in mainstream content classes at the high school and college levels.  Academic 

English takes up to 7 years to develop, in most cases.  The academic content and learning 

strategies beginning with math and science and gradually work into the language arts and then 

the social sciences.  Teachers may implement CALLA’s instructional model in their classroom as 

a way to meet the challenges of implementing the standards of content-based language 

instruction that is required of their school district or state (Chamot & O’Malley, 1994, 1999).

180

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

 In The CALLA Handbook, Chamot and O'Malley (1994) provided teachers with useful 

research on effective instructional strategies that will help LEP students to succeed.  The research 

findings revealed that when teachers carefully chose a learning strategy to implement that was 

appropriate for a given task, their LEP students improved their academic English remarkably. 

LEP students began to take ownership of their education by regulating their learning through a 

strategic approach to learning tasks.  Chamot and O"Malley indicated students worked more 

independently and were less dependent on their teacher after learning the strategies.

  

According to Chamot and O'Malley (1994), CALLA should be utilized to develop 

academic content as the primary purpose of instruction.  The secondary purpose is to develop 

language skills out of the content areas as the need arises.  The purpose of using content in the 

development of English is simply to provide meaningful context for the students.  Instead of 

“watering down” the curriculum, a CALLA teacher presents an array of instructional strategies 

that are research based, and uses complex content in lecture and activities.  These methodologies 

allow LEP students to comprehend the underlying meaning.  CALLA teachers use every means 

possible and may borrow from other disciplines, such as MI, gifted and talented, or special 

education, to provide the meaningful or comprehensible input needed to help their students be 

successful.  Teachers find a way to allow all students to participate no matter how fluent they are 

in English (Chamot & O’Malley, 1994, 1999).  

181

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Conclusion

Educators can no longer remain on the sidelines while neuroscience reveals important 

information about how the brain learns.  As understanding of the brain continues to grow, it is up 

to teachers to continue to interpret these findings and apply the research to their teachings so that 

their students' learning evolves over time.  Brain research does not dictate to teachers what to 

teach or how they teach; it merely offers an insight that may assist them in lesson planning, 

delivery, and assessment.  Teachers must not abandon their traditional sources of insight and 

guidance when it comes to planning effective instruction.  Teachers must continue to draw upon 

cognitive research while still developing their own insights based upon their classroom 

experience.  The two sources of information (research and experience) should complement each 

other so that cognitive science reinforces what seasoned professionals already know about 

learning.

Teachers are expert practitioners.  They can build their craft by knowing more about how 

the brain processes and stores information.  This knowledge strengthens their expertise about 

educational practices that build accountability and trust.  When educators consider neuroscience, 

they organize their curriculum around real experiences and integrated, "whole" ideals.  They 

tailor instruction to promote complex thinking and the natural "growth" of the brain.  Brain-

based teachers understand the development of the human brain and its "windows of opportunity,” 

when the hard, permanent wiring must take place.  To miss these windows can handicap 

students’ ability to learn.  Educational experiences create connections in the brain that form the 

foundation for spoken language, reading, comprehension of written language, writing, and 

182

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

problem solving.  These experiences will allow students to recall past experiences and use this 

information to make neural connections.  Instructional approaches consist primarily of trying to 

maintain a relaxed, focused atmosphere that offers options for learning in individually satisfying 

ways; this represents a major shift from the old paradigm of the teacher-centered classroom. 

Traditional schooling often inhibits learning by discouraging, ignoring, or punishing the brain's 

natural learning processes (Classroom Compass, p. 1). 

To be effective, teachers must have a knowledge base that is kept current by acquiring 

scientific understanding of the brain.  Only then can teachers determine the educational 

applications of the research.  By increasing their knowledge base, teachers will gain competence 

in determining which classroom strategies are more compatible with the current understanding of 

the brain.  Teachers must design learning around students’ interests and make learning 

contextual.  They must let their students learn in teams and use peripheral learning.  Teachers 

must structure students’ learning around real problems, and encourage their students to learn in 

settings outside the classroom and the school building.  In view of the fact that all students learn, 

their assessments should allow them to understand their own learning styles and preferences.  In 

this fashion, students will monitor and enhance their own learning process.  

Sheltered English teachers use various extra-linguistic learning strategies or 

modifications to aid in building LEP students’ cognitive academic language proficiency (CALP). 

Some SEI techniques utilized by teachers include SDAIE and CALLA, TPR, visual aids, realia, 

manipulatives, hands-on activities, props, body language repetitions, pauses in speech, and 

various types of technology.  These techniques help facilitate comprehensible content, as 

frequent checks for comprehension is incorporated.  Thematic instruction and holistic lesson 

183

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

plans are often implemented to encourage student interest and facilitate long-term memory 

(English for the Children, 1998; ELLKBase; Freeman, 1998; Krashen, 1981, 1985; Nevin, 1993; 

Short, 1998; Thomas & Collier, 2001).  Teachers trained in SDAIE and CALLA pedagogical 

theories frequently check their LEP students for progress in terms of understanding.  Further, 

these educators check themselves on how well they are meeting the needs of their students they 

face on daily basis.  By implementing instructional strategies, such as SDAIE or CALLA, that 

are grounded in brain-based research, teachers will be forced to scrutinize every aspect of their 

lessons they are delivering; in essence, it will make them better educators.   

Teachers nationwide must do a better job at teaching their LEP students English.  They 

must do whatever it takes to encourage their students to become life-long learners.  Too many 

students are faltering in the current educational system.  Teachers must continue to take a 

leadership role in shaping their students’ learning.  It is an educator’s duty to make innovative 

and effective changes in his/her classroom to encourage student engagement and comprehension. 

Change is inevitable, and teachers must embrace the new information that is coming from the 

field of brain research.  All educators have their students’ futures in their hands.  If educators 

become complacent and stagnant in their teachings, LEP students will continue to be withdrawn 

and/or to drop out of school.  Alternately, a brain-based educator can shape minds, inspiring their 

students to achieve and dream of a future that matches their unique skills and abilities. 

184

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

References

Barron, M. Surprising truths: The implications of brain research. Retrieved February 23, 2003, 

from http://www.nauticom.net/www/cokids/brain.html.

Bower, B. The brain is tuned to grammar as music is tuned to lyrics. Retrieved February 23, 

2003, from http://www.brainconnection.com.

Brain-Based Learning. Retrieved February 23, 2003, from http://www.funderstanding.com.

Bruer, J. (1999). In search of brain based learning. Kaplan. Retrieved February 23, 2003,  from 

http://www.pdkintl.org/kappan/kappan.htm.

Bueno, K. (1999). Glossary. Retrieved April 28, 2003, from 

http://www.siue.edu/~kbueno/fl486/gloss.html. 

Caine, R. N., & Caine, G. (1991). Making connections: Teaching and the human brain

Alexandria, VA: ASCD.

Caine, R. N., & Caine, G. (1994). Mindshift. Tucson, Arizona: Zephyr Press.

Caine, R. N., & Caine, G. (1997).  Unleashing the power of perceptual change. Alexandria, 

Virginia: ASCD. 

Chamot, A. U. & O'Malley, J. M. (1994). The CALLA handbook. White Plains, NY: Longman. 

Chamot, A. U., Barnhardt, S., El-Dinary, P.B., & Robbins, J. (1999). The Learning Strategies 

Handbook. White Plains, NY: Longman.

Chan, T. (1998, Nov.). The brain learns better in well-designed school environments. Classroom 

Leadership, 2(3). Retrieved February 24, 2003, from

 

http://www.ascd.org/pubs/cl/2nov98.html.

Christison, M. A. (1990, Oct.). Cooperative learning in the EFL classroom.  English Teaching 

Forum. Retrieved September 1, 2002, from 
http://exchanges.state.gov/education/engteaching/chr1099.htm.

Christison, M. A. (1996). Multiple intelligences in the second language classroom. TESOL 

Journal.  Alexandria, VA: TESOL.

Christison, M. A. (1998, April-June). Applying multiple intelligences theory in preservice and 

inservice TEFL education programs. English Teaching Forum.

185

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Christison, M. A. (1999, April/May). Applications of brain based research to second language 

teaching and learning: Part 1TESOL Matters, 9 (2). Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 
http://www.tesol.org.

Christison, M. A. (1999, April/May).  Applying mind-brain principles to L2 teaching. TESOL 

Matters, 7(4). Retrieved February 24, 2003, from http://www.tesol.org.

Christison, M. A. (1999, June/July). Applications of brain based research to second language 

teaching and learning: Part 2. TESOL Matters, 9 (3). Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 
http://www.tesol.org.

Christison, M. A. (1999, Dec). Classroom compass: How can research on the brain in form 

education? Multiple Intelligences: Theory and practice in adult ESL. Retrieved February 
24, 2003, from http://www.cal.org/ncle/digests/MI.htm

 

 .  

Classroom Compass (2000). How can research on the brain inform education? 3 (2).  Retrieved 

September 22, 2002, from http://www.sedl.org/scimath/compass/v03n02/brain.html.

Curtain, H. (1995). Foreign language and content instruction in grades K-8. Retrieved February 

24, 2003, from 
http://www.uncc.edu/~medomoto/4201/handouts/tpr%20and%20other%20strategies/calla
.html.

Crandall, J., Jaramillo, A., Olsen, L., & Kreeft Peyton, J. (2002, Oct). Using cognitive strategies 

to develop English language and literacy. Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 
http://www.cal.org/ericcll/digest/0205crandall.html.

Cogito: Brain and Mind (2002). Retrieved December 26, 2002, from 

http://www.educ.drake.edu/romig/cogito/brain_and_mind.html.

D’ Arcangelo, M. (2000, June). Wake-up call about brain research. Education Update, 42( 4). 

Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 
http://www.ascd.org/readingroom/edupdate/2000/june00/02jun00.html. 

 D’ Arcangelo, M. (1998, Nov). How the brain learns: The brains behind the brains. Educational 

Leadership, 56(3). Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 
http://www.ascd.org/readingroom/edlead/9811/darcangelo.html.

Duignan, P. Hoover essay. Bilingual education: A critique. Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 

http://www.hooverstandfordedu./publications/he/22/22d.html.

Edelman, G. M. (1992). Bright air, brilliant fire: On the matter of the mind. New York: Basic.

186

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Effective instructional practices for language minority students. MAEC. Retrieved July 29, 2002, 

from http:www.maec.org/instprac.htlm.

English for the Children (1998, February). Falsehoods and facts about "English for the 

Children.” In English for the Children. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4255.

English for the Children of Arizona (2003). Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 

http://www.angelfire.com/az/english4thechildren/body.html.  

ELLKBase (2002). A framework for alternative language programs [Data file]. Region VII 

Comprehensive Center. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/practitionerstips/Framework_ALP.shtml.

The English plus alternative. Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 

http://ourworld.compuserve.com/homepages/JWCRAWFORD/EPIC.htm.

Freeman, D., & Freeman, Y. Sheltered English instruction. Retrieved June 29, 2002, from ERIC 

Digest: http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/ed301070.html.

Freeman, D., & Freeman, Y. (1998).  ESL/EFL teaching: Principles for success.  Portsmouth, 

NH: Heinemann.

Friedlander, M. (1991, Fall).  The newcomers program: Helping immigrant students succeed in 

U.S. schools. NCBE program information guide series, 8.  Retrieved November 1, 2002, 
from http://ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/pigs/pig8.htm; 
http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/refernces/NEWCOMERPROGRAMTableCo

Gardner, H. (1983). Frames of mind: The theory of multiple intelligences. New York: Basic 

Books.

Gardner, H. (1993). Multiple intelligences: The theory in practice. New York: Basic Books.

Gardner, H. (1995). "Are there additional intelligences?  The case for the naturalist 

intelligence." Howard Project Zero. Cambridge, MA: President and Fellows of Howard 
College.

Garvin, I. (1996). Authentic-alternative assessment. Retrieved June 29, 2003, from 

http://iteachnet.org.

Genesee, F. (1999-2001). Bilingual acquisition. Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 

http://earlychildhood.com/Articles/index.

187

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Genesee, F. (2000). Brain ResearchImplications for Second Language Learning. Retrieved 

February 24, 2003, from Eric Digest: http://cal.org./oricall/digest/ooo12brain.html.

Gulack, J. & Silverstein, (1997). SDAIE handbook: Techniques, strategies, and suggestions for 

teachers of LEP and former LEP StudentsRetrieved February 24, 2003, from 
http://www.csupomona.edu/~tassi/SDAIE .htm.

Hakuta, K. (2001, April 13). The education of language minority students. Paper presented at 

United States Commission on Civil Rights. Retrieved September 22, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Docs/CivilRightsCommision.htm.

Hakuta, K. (2002, August 22). Points on SAT-9 performance and Proposition 227. Retrieved 

September 8, 2002, from http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Hakuta, K. (2002, August 29). What can we learn about the impact of Proposition 227 from SAT-

9 Scores. Retrieved September 8, 2002, from http://www.stanford.edu/~hakuta/.

Hakuta, K. & August, D. (1997). Improving education for all children: meeting the Needs of 

Language Minority Children. Retrieved August 6, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Aspen.html.

Hancock, C. R. (1994). Alternative assessment and second language study: What and why? 

Retrieved June 29, 2003, from Eric Digest Available: 
http://www.ed.gov/databases/ERIC_Digests/.

Hart, L. (1995, January 25). Human brain and human learning. Your child’s mind. Time 

Magazine.

How the Brain Learns: The Key to Student Achievement. Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 

http://www.brainconnection.com.

How the Brain “Hears” Language. Retrieved August 22, 2002, from 

http://www.brainconnection.com.

Jensen, E (1998, November). How the brain learns: How Julie’s brain learns. Educational 

Leadership, 56 (2), Retrieved September 6, 2002, from 
http://www.ascd.org/readingroom/edlead/9811/darcangelo.html. 

Jensen, E. (1998). Teaching with the brain in mind.  Alexandria, Virgina: ASCD

Kennedy, D. Key Resources, 3(2). Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 

http://sedl.org.scimath/compass.

188

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Kenosha Unified School District (KUSD) Five-Year long range committee (2003). Kenosha 

Unified School District No. 1, Kenosha, WI.

Krashen, S. (1981). Second language acquisition and second language learning. (1

st

 ed. Internet, 

December 2002).  Retrieved January 3, 2003, from 
http://www.sdkrashen.com/SL_Acquisition_and_Learning/index.html.

Krashen, S. (1997). Why bilingual education? Retrieved August 6, 2002, from 

http://ourworld.compuserve.com/homepages/JWCRAWFORD/bil-new.html.

Krashen, S. (1985). Insights and inquires. Hayward, CA: Alemany Press.

Krashen, S. (1999). Structured immersion falls short of expectations: An analysis of Clark. 

NABE.

Krashen, S. (2002, August 26). Focus on the library, not the playground [Letter to the editor]. 

Arizona Republic.

McLaughlin, B. (1992). Myths and misconceptions about second language learning: What Every 

Teacher needs to Unlearn.  Retrieved August 22, 2002, from 
http://www.bilingualprek.org/dl/myths.pdf.

Netkin, H. (1998, May). An assessment of bilingual education. In Letter. Retrieved September 6, 

2002, from http://onenation.org/article.cfm?ID=4032.

Nevin, A., Neciichea, J., & Cline, Z. Using data-based instruction to improve the learning 

outcomes of students who are difficult to teach. CSUSM College of Education. Retrieved 
July 29, 2003, from http://www.csusm.edu/thousand/necochea.html.

Nunan, D. (2001). English as a global language. TESOL Quarterly, 35(4).

Peterson, B. The Evolution of Language. Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 

http://www.brainconnection.com. 

Peterson, K. Authentic assessment and school wide projects. Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 

http://www.wcer.wisc.edu/ccvi/pubs/publication/archive/newsletter/Winter1997_Weaving
AuthenticAssessment/AuthAssessment_SchoolwideProj.htm.

Rohac, R. (2000, May). SDAIE - Specially designed academic instruction in English. Retrieved 

January 3, 2003, from http://rohac.com/sdaieinfo.htm.

189

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Short, D. (1998).  Secondary Newcomers programs: Helping recent immigrants prepare for 

school success. ERIC Digest (ED#411703). Washington, DC: ERIC Clearinghouse on 
Languages and Linguistics. Retrieved February 24, 2003, from 
http://www.cal.org/crede/newcomer.htm.

Short, D. J. (2002).  Newcomers programs: An educational alternative for secondary immigrant 

students. Education and Urban Society 34(2), 173-198. Retrieved July 29, 2002, from 
http://www.cal.org/crede/newcomer.htm.

Short, D. & Boyson, B. (2000). Center for research on education, diversity & excellence 

(CREDE). Summary of data in secondary newcomer directory.  Center for Applied 
Linguistics. Retrieved July 29,2002, from http://www.cal.org/crede/newsummary.htm.

Short, D. & Boyson, B. (2002) Center for Research on Education, Diversity & Excellence 

(CREDE).  Newcomers: Language and academic programs for recent immigrants. Center 
for Applied Linguistic. Retrieved July 29, 2002, from 
http://www.cal.org/crede/newsummary.htm

 

 .  

Sousa, D. (1998). Is the fuss about brain research justified? Retreived May 12, 2003, from 

http://www.edweek.org/ew/vol-18/16sousa.h18.

Sprenger, M. Learning and memory: The brain in action. 1999 Retrieved February 24, 2003, 

from http://www.ascd.org/pubs/cl/2nov98.html.

Sylwester, R. (1996). Celebrating neurons. Alexandria, Virginia: ASCD.  

Talukder, G. How the brain makes way for a second language. Retrieved February 23, 2003, 

from http://www.brainconnection.com.

Thomas, W. P., & Collier, V. P. (2001). A national study of school effectiveness for language 

minority students' long-term academic achievement. Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 
http://www.crede.ucsc.edu/research.

Tomlinson, C. (1999).  The differentiated classroom. Responding to the needs of all learners. The 

Association for Supervision and Curriculum Development. Retrieved March 15, 2003, 
from http://www.ascd.org/readingroom/books/tomlin99book.html#chap1.

Vygotsky and Social Cognition. Retrieved February 23, 2003, from 

http://www.funderstanding.com.

190

background image

QUESTION 6

Evaluate how  CBT or WBT can be used to improve staff development offerings for language 
assistance teachers?  Develop a comprehensive staff development program using CBT or WBT

“Over the past two decades, America’s classrooms have undergone an  unmistakable 

metamorphosis” (Friedlander, 1991, p. 1).  There are over 8.6 million children enrolled in U.S. 

schools and nearly 40% require some sort of language assistance (Hakuta, 2001).  Today, 

virtually all school districts, whether rural or urban, have at least one limited English proficient 

(LEP) student (Friedlander, 1991; Short, 1998; Viadero, 20001).  This new wave of immigration 

sweeping the U.S. is vastly different from that of a hundred years ago.  Most of the 26.8 million 

immigrants living in the U.S. come from Latin America, Asia, the Caribbean, and the Middle 

East (Short, 1998).  Forty percent of new immigrants are under 18 years of age, and one in five 

children in America is an immigrant or a child of immigrants (Viadero, 2000).  These new 

immigrants are coming from a variety of educational realms; some come from well-educated 

families with valuable expertise and knowledge, while others come from highly impoverished 

areas (Friedlander, 1991; Short, 1998; Viadero, 2000). 

 

It is more difficult to educate the new 

immigrants, when compared to immigrants of the past, because most new immigrants come from 

non-English speaking countries, where access to formal education is limited (Short, 1998; 

Viadero, 2000).  Limited English proficient (LEP) is the legal definition used to identify students 

who were not born in the U.S., or whose native language is not English and who cannot 

participate effectively in the regular curriculum because they have difficulty speaking, 

understanding, reading, and writing in English (Department of Education-OCR, 1999).  LEP is 

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

the term recognized by the Office of Civil Rights (OCR) and therefore will be the term used 

throughout this comprehensive paper. 

States and school districts are searching for effective methods to train their staff on how 

to educate their LEP students in the mainstreamed classroom.  School districts and universities 

are currently failing to meet their LEP students' needs.  These institutions are having difficulty 

locating, hiring, and training qualified Bilingual and ESL language teachers (Hakuta, 1998). 

New research indicates that children in schools with many minority and 
poor students are more likely to be taught by under qualified teachers. 
Those findings are emerging just as other studies are beginning to quantify 
the   damage   that   an   ineffective   teacher   can   do.     Research   by  William 
Sanders and his colleagues at the University of Tennessee suggest that 
three consecutive years of bad teachers can significantly hamper a child’s 
learning over the long run. (Viadero, 2000, p. 30) 

Instructors of LEP students typically receive specialized training in bilingual and/or English as a 

Second Language (ESL) education.  In 1998, according to the California Department of 

Education, there were only 14,965 certified bilingual teachers and only 9,188 who were in 

training nationwide (Hakuta, 1998).  This number is not enough to meet the ever-increasing need 

for language assistance teachers who provide services to LEP students in mainstreamed/general 

education classrooms.  

The most challenging task facing American educators is finding or developing 

methodologies to successfully integrate new LEP students into the academic arena.   Effective 

teachers must continually update their professional skills; however, today’s educators are 

inundated and overworked.  Teachers lack time to keep up with advances in their subject matter 

192

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

and lack the funds to obtain the additional professional development needed.  To aid in this 

endeavor, a school district may elect to adopt available technologies, such as technology-based 

learning programs, to enhance the educational development and/or professional development of 

its staff (Beer; 2000; Gibson, 1992; Hakuta, 1998; Philips, 1999; Short, 1998; Viadero, 2000).

Technology-based Learning Inception

Education is changing and evolving over time.  As in the business world, today’s 

educational institutions are transitioning into the Information Age.  Education via the use of 

electronic technology is challenging traditional modes of instruction that have been in common 

practice for hundreds of years.  Because there are over twenty-five million host servers on the 

Internet and over two hundred million users today, school districts, administrators, and educators 

are beginning to reexamine the learning process of when, how, and where learning occurs 

(Chute, Thompson, & Hancock, 1999).  Many educational institutions and corporations are 

investing in a wide range of educational services or courses that are posted on the Internet and/or 

downloaded to their Intranet. 

The power and the flexibility of distance learning technologies offer new 
and   enhanced   ways   to   incorporate   active   and   interactive   learning 
experiences into curricula at all educational levels to most appropriately 
meet the needs of an increasingly diverse population of learners. (Chute et 
al., 1999, p. 4)

Technology-based learning (TBL) is a viable option for school districts and/or 

administrators to improve their staff professional development.  Technology-based learning 

193

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

(TBL) is the “preferred term for any form of technology to deliver or support learning” (Philips, 

1999, p. 289). Technology-based learning encompasses presentation and delivery methods using 

multimedia, videoconferencing, virtual reality, Groupware, distance learning, Internet/ Intranets, 

CD-ROMS, satellites, e-mail, and voicemail (Philips, 1999).  

School districts and administrators are incorporating newly available distance learning or 

Internet instruction to train staff and/or to provide specialized training to meet their schools’ 

individualized needs (Beer, 2000; McKenzie, 2001).  Distance learning courses allow a 

participant to access the training he/she needs anywhere, any time, and at any location.  The 

student must have access to a computer, a CD-ROM, and/or a reliable connection to his/her 

organization’s Intranet or to the Internet.  Many educators are restructuring and creating an ideal 

learning environment for their students and are employing new technologies to address their 

needs.  At Weekend College programs, multimedia programs and additional educational 

opportunities are rapidly being developed.  Through the use of satellite broadcasting, an array of 

learning opportunities are now available for millions of people worldwide (Beer, 2000; Gibson, 

1992).  The virtual campus has shifted learning environments from a teacher/professor-centered 

approach to a student-centered system of learning.  Eighty-five percent of two-year colleges and 

84% of four-year colleges were projected to offer distance learning courses by 2002 (Brown, 

John, & Duguid, 1996; Herrington, Oliver, & Omari, 1996; Gallego, 1998; Philips, 1999; Young, 

1997).

194

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Internet/Intranet-based Training

The explosion of technological advances is due to the launch of the Internet, twenty-five 

years ago, followed by the inception of the Worldwide Web (WWW) in 1989 (Chute et al., 

1999).  Commonly referred to as the “Net, the World Wide Web, or simply the Web, the Internet 

is the largest computer network in the world” (Philips, 1999, p. 303).  The Internet has made it 

possible for one to communicate quickly, easily, and inexpensively anywhere in the world.  The 

Internet has allowed organizations to expand the various types of technology, including distance 

learning via web-based training or Internet/Intranet training.  In 1998, there were 710,000 

students enrolled in some form of distance-learning program, and the number was projected to 

increase to over 2.2 million in 2002 (Driscoll, 1999; Gallego, 1999; Herrington et al., 1996; 

Philips, 1999).  The delivery of TBL opportunities available via the Internet/Intranets includes 

the use of e-mail, multimedia, WBT, and CBT (Brown et al., 1996).  Training Industry Magazine 

reported that 19 % of training courses available were delivered via computer using CD-ROMs, 

diskettes, or online via the Internet (Brown et al., 1996; Philips, 1999).  

“Internet-based training is referred to any skill or knowledge transfer that takes place 

using the WWW as a distribution channel” (Gallego, 1998, p. 7).  The Internet/Intranet has made 

it possible for corporations to provide “just-in-time training” to their employees anywhere across 

the globe.  The delivery is virtual and “distance becomes irrelevant which makes it ideal for 

global learning solutions” (Philips, 1999, p. 304).  An Intranet is an internal network that 

organizations use to deliver in-house information; this information is not available to the public 

195

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

(Leiden & Wilensky, 2000).  By placing a single website on an organization’s Intranet, it allows 

administrators and staff to access all types of learning resources within the organization. The 

resources may include internal, external, instructor led programs, on-line courses, fixed media 

coaching resources, books, or on-the-job training courses (Philips, 1999, p. 295). 

Internet/Intranet instruction is now one of the most popular instructional modes for a variety of 

reasons (Beer, 2000; Philips, 1999).  “It is easily accessible, it supports flexible storage and 

display options, it provides a simple yet powerful publishing format and a means to incorporate 

multiple media elements” (Herrington et al., 1996, p. 2). 

The   emergence   of   the   Worldwide   Web,   with   its   easy-to-use   graphical 
interface,   has   drastically   altered   the   way   in   which   people   access 
information, and how they think about computers.  Methods in which we 
deliver   and   receive   instruction   may   also   be   on   the   brink   of   a   new 
dimension.  (Hoffman & Ritchie, 1996, p. 1)

Interactive forms of communications include electronic e-mails, interactive television, 

and teleconferencing.  As the name suggests, interactive forms of communication allow the 

instructor and the participants to interact with one another in live time.  Networks allow 

organizations to provide desktop platforms to interface with each other.  Networks include the 

Internet, Intranets, local-area networks (LANs), and wide-area networks (WANs) (Leiden & 

Wilensky, 2000).  A LAN is defined as computers or other devices that communicate over small 

geographical areas, such as a home office, a floor of a building, or even several buildings on a 

small campus (Leiden & Wilensky, 2000).  A WAN is a network of computers that span 

geographical distances that are too large for a LAN (Leiden & Wilensky, 2000).  Organizations 

that use networks are able to reduce training costs because networks do not require complex 

196

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

software.  Incorporating multimedia is an efficient and cost-effective way to deliver training 

(Chute et al., 1999; Philips, 1999).

Web-based and Computer-based Training

Technology-based learning includes web-based training (WBT) and computer-based 

training (CBT).  Web based training (WBT) may be delivered in a variety of modes.  For 

instance, the simple text-only utilizes e-mail technology, whereas more complex networking 

utilizes multimedia and/or live video-conferencing (Beer, 2000).  Computer-based training 

(CBT) often includes the use of CD-ROMs, or diskettes used by an individual, to provide instant 

and up-to-date instruction (Beer, 2000).  CD-ROMS are considered today to be one of the best 

delivery systems for TBL.  Web-based training differs from CBT in that WBT requires a 

computer with a connection to the Internet, whereas CBT can include the use of one computer 

with a CD-ROM inserted to deliver instructional materials.  Web-based training is considered to 

be more versatile and "user- friendly" than CBT; it is always available as long as the user has 

Internet or Intranet access (Beer, 2000).  Computer-based training devices may be ineffectual if 

the user is not able to upload the information (Beer, 2000; Chute et al., 1999; Gibson, 1992; 

Philips, 1999).  

“Web-based training generally applies to any kind of instructional material delivered over 

a corporate Intranet or Internet accessed by browser-equipped users” (Gallego, 1999, p. 3).

  

Web-

based instruction is described as “a hypermedia instructional program which utilizes the 

attributes and resources of the World Wide Web to create a meaningful learning environment 

197

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

where learning is fostered and supported" (Brandon 1997, p. 1).  Web-based training is an 

innovative method that incorporates a distance learning format; in this format, CBT is 

transformed by the technologies and methodologies of the Internets/Intranets.  Web-based 

training programs offer base knowledge instruction that engages the learner in problem solving 

exercises and provide a summation of the participants’ overall performance (Beer, 2000).  With 

full access to the Internet, WBT programs can expand to include a worldwide community of 

learners not accessible in an ordinary classroom (Beer, 2000; Boshier & Gallego, 1998; Chute et 

al., 1999; Philips, 1999; Wilson & Qayyum, 1999).

In Australia, CBT has been legislated to a greater extent than in most 
countries.  Policy directives at the national/federal level I the early 1990s 
have ensured that competency-based training would become the preferred 
method of delivery of VET [Vocational Education and Training]…  Today, 
CBT is synonymous with training in Australia.  (Lowrie, 1999, p. 2) 

WBT can be delivered synchronously or asynchronously.  In an asynchronous virtual 

classroom delivery, students and instructors are not required to engage in online collaborative 

learning activities at the same time.  With this type of program, learners are usually self-directed 

and/or self-paced. This type of instruction utilizes hypermedia, hypertexts, online quizzes, and e-

mail (Beer, 2000; Driscoll 1999; Gallego, 1999; Herrington et al., 1996).  A more technically 

sophisticated WBT course may use a synchronous mode of instructional delivery that resembles 

more of a “traditional” classroom because it may consist of an instructor and students who are 

online at the same time (Beer, 2000).  The instructor facilitates the instruction and guides his/her 

students through conversations regarding the course context using questions, discussions, and 

debate tactics.  Tools utilized in synchronous course include electronic whiteboards, video-

198

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

conferencing, audio-conferencing, and online chats (Beer, 2000; Gallego, 1998).  This process is 

commonly referred to as "interactivity" because there is dialogue between the participants (Beer, 

2000; Gallego, 1998; Herrington et al., 1996). “Through their connection across time and space, 

teachers and students gain experiences, share text, graphics, audio, video, and virtual reality 

experiences” (Weinstein, 1997, p. 24).  

WBT programs can save organizations money even though they are rather expensive to 

develop initially.  School districts and administrators must consider the development costs, which 

include the following: equipment, software, hardware, and program maintenance.  The cost of 

WBT programs varies depending on the organization's technological infrastructures already in 

place.  If the organization has no existing infrastructure, the cost could range from $25,000 to 

$50,000 (Beer, 2000; Chute et al., 1999; Philips, 1999; Wilson & Qayyum, 1999).  If a school 

district opts to send fifteen employees to a traditional training program, it could cost the district 

an average of $24,000.  This amount, according to numerous experts, is less than the estimated 

cost for developing a WBT; however, the costs of creating a WBT could be recovered initially 

and/or over time of the program (Beer, 2000; Boshier & Gallego, 1998).

Technology-based Learning and Education

Technology-based learning has particular implications not only for the student, but, for 

the teaching profession and the learning environment.  Technology-based learning utilizes 

multimedia that is capable of evaluation, adaptation, and remediation; all multimedia is 

independent of the computer platforms of each user.  Educational organizations are now offering 

199

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

a wide range of courses and programs without having the additional expense of adding buildings 

and classrooms (Beer, 2000).  A student may enroll in an unlimited number of correspondence 

courses and distance learning educational programs.  These programs are now regarded as 

important educational environments in which a significant number of adults are opting to enroll 

(Beer, 2000; Chute et al., 1999; Gibson, 1992; Philips, 1999).  

Technology is not only challenging and transforming higher education, but secondary and 

elementary education as well.  Distance learning technologies are being implemented into 

schools to improve the quality of instruction delivered.  Secondary and elementary schools are 

offering on-line full-time accredited distance educational programs.  Advanced placement high 

school courses are available on-line for secondary students.  In Appleton, Wisconsin students in 

grades K-8 are now (2003-2004) able to attend a virtual charter school called Wisconsin 

Connections Academy (Borsuk, 2002).  “The school plans to use teachers hired by Appleton and 

curriculum provided by a private company, Sylvan Ventures, to educate about 300 children 

learning from their homes all across the state” (Borsuk, 2002, p. 1).  A curriculum enrichment 

program, such as the "virtual field trip," is also available at most school districts (Borsuk, 2002). 

These types of technologies offer educators tools for design of their learning environment that 

encourages their students to work on activities both individually and collaboratively with other 

students around the globe (Chute et al., 1999).  

Technology-based Learning Effectiveness 

200

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Regardless of what type of instructional delivery that is utilized with TBL, instructors and 

participants who are separated by space and time, come together.  Today’s educators have the 

ability to develop the skills necessary to require students to analyze, synthesize, and evaluate the 

information presented (Chute et al., 1999; Driscoll 1999; Gallego, 1999; Herrington et al.,1996). 

To be an effective TBL program, it must be aligned with how adults (children if applicable) learn 

and process information (Grill, 1999).  According to Grill (1999), the distance learner's average 

age ranges from 25 to 50 years.  These adults are often self-directed learners who tend to focus 

on the process and take control of their own learning.  Often, TBL students set their own learning 

goals, locate appropriate resources, and determine which learning methods to employ.  They also 

tend to evaluate their own progress along the way, allowing them to keep up with others enrolled 

in the course.  Although there is no physical classroom where distance learners meet, they do 

communicate with each other as part of study groups.  

Technology-based learning programs tend to utilize experiential learning theory models, 

which postulate that students' learning should be built upon their own experiences, and that their 

experiences represent a valuable resource (Jarvis, 1987).  Technology-based learning allows 

participants to progress through their training at their own pace (Beer, 2000).  It also provides the 

student with the opportunity to immediately evaluate his/her own learning.  As "most WBT 

programs are little more than self-paced learning, success in these programs hinges on the 

learner's ability to engage in self-directed learning and to develop metacognitive skills for the 

Web" (Driscoll, 1999, p. 24).

201

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Instructors play a vital role in the success of a TBL program.  Instructor effectiveness is 

one of the determining factors in participant dropout rate; however, this is also true of traditional 

courses.  Traditional courses provide a detailed time frame that allows the participant to complete 

the course in the manner set out before them.  In TBL, instructors facilitate learning by using 

creative lessons and incorporating a variety of multimedia modes into their lectures.  Often, 

courses are subdivided into incremental sections, which are taught in a systematical manner. 

Activities utilized in TBL often include advanced graphic organizers, hyperlinks, and 

scaffolding.  These methods are designed to help students construct knowledge and complete 

tasks utilizing their interpersonal and analytical skills (Beer, 2000; Brown, 2000; Herrington et 

al., 1996).  "Learning communities must foster communication between teacher and student, and 

use the computational power of the Web to provide rich media that enhance the learning process" 

(Driscoll, 1999, p. 25).  

It facilitates student-centered approaches creating a motivating and active 
learning   environment;   it   supports   and   encourages   browsing   and 
exploration, learner behaviors that are frequently associated with higher-
order learning.  The nature of the organization … appears to closely mimic 
human   memory,   and   retrieval   methods   closely   resemble   the   human 
thought processes.  (Herrington et al., 1996, p. 1)

Web-based training and CBT provide an effective learning environment that offers 

students flexibility of course materials, immediate communication with peers and instructors, 

and the informational feedback that they desire (Beers, 2000).  Effective web-based tasks require 

participants to build from their prior knowledge as well as apply their new skills and abilities in a 

more insightful manner 

(Chute et al., 1999; 

Lightfoot, 1998, 1999; Rowe & Gregor, 1999; Yang, 

202

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

2001).  Technology-based learning courses instigate problem-solving, critical thinking skills, and 

acknowledge the diverse cognitive learning styles of their participants.  Technology-based 

learning offers hands-on, cooperative, real-world learning activities.  Appropriately, designed 

courses engage participants in finding real-world solutions to real-life problems (Beer, 2000).  At 

the same time, the students construct new tools for understanding, based upon their prior 

knowledge (Brown, 2000).  The materials themselves do not actually teach the participants but 

provides a medium that supports learning (Herrington et al., 1996).  In a professional 

development course on tolerance education, an instructor may assign participants the task of 

demonstrating the ways culture sometimes impedes classroom learning.  A participant may use 

web-based search engines or a library database to find information on culture in schools.  The 

participants may use their own set of resources and capabilities to access the necessary 

information needed to complete the lesson (Beer, 2000; Brown, 2000).

Technology-based Learning Limitations

Despite its multiplicity of applications, the Internet is not the best educational or training 

environment for some people.  Herrington and colleagues (1996) found that in many instances 

delivery via the Web might impede learning rather than enhance learning when compared to 

conventional educational forms.  Participants tend to become disenfranchised because 

technology may be intimidating for some users.  Learners do not always have the technology 

skills, navigational skills, and/or prior knowledge of the subject matter needed to effectively 

learn in TBL (Beer, 2000; Eastmond, 1998; Tergan, 1997).  Technology-based learning may 

203

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

require the learner to have more complex technical skills (Wilson & Lowry, 1998).  Learners 

may have to use video, animation, audio, e-mails, bulletin boards, online chats, complicated 

software, and  web browsers such as MS Internet Explorer, and Netscape Navigator (Driscoll, 

1999; Gallego, 1999; Herrington et al.,1996; Wonacott, 2000).    

Often the constraints of TBL have to do with the students’ technological skills and their 

attitude towards the faculty.  “WBT courses tend not to be as interactive as instructor-led ones, 

and the absence of an instructor means that most students will not push themselves as hard” 

(Heckler, 1999, p. 4).  Learners who experience difficulty with the courses have indicated the 

need for more one-on-one interaction with their instructor, including the need for further input 

and feedback on their progress.  Based upon completed program evaluations, some participants 

experienced isolation in their courses, from their instructors and were less engaged overall (Beer, 

2000; Brown, 2000; Edelson, 1998).  Experts conclude unsatisfactory evaluations could be 

related to TBL instructors not being adequately trained in facilitation of TBL courses, how to 

increase their students' participation and interaction while other instructors tend to utilize the 

more traditional mode of delivery, the lecture mode, as the predominant method of instruction 

(Beer, 2000; Brown, 2000; Edelson, 1998).  

  

Researchers, including Lightfoot (1998, 1999) and Lowrie (1999), have found the 

opposite contention to be true.  Their research suggested that participants enrolled in WBT 

courses on the Web experienced immediate and more productive interactions with their peers and 

their instructor.  Through course feedbacks, learners have stated they had a more intimate 

learning experience and had experienced more ownership, which led to more positive learning 

outcomes.  Participants reported a stronger sense of connection to their peer learning community 

204

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

and had developed a more powerful learning experience as a result of their participation in the 

WBT course.  The researchers also indicated that successful completion of WBT/CBT courses 

was difficult for those participants who were undisciplined or lacked motivation. While 

motivation is always important, those who lack discipline may be suited to a more traditional 

learning environment (Beer, 20000; Brown, 2000; Lightfoot, 1998, 1999; Vondanovich & 

Piotrowski, 1999, 2000).

Conclusion

The use of TBL is rapidly growing because of the advantages this type of instruction 

offers to educational organizations.  Children will enjoy more in-class contact time with their 

teachers.  Teachers will be able to participate in training that is relevant to their particular needs 

and on their own time, when convenient for their schedules.  Technology-based learning allows 

participants the flexibility of choosing the time and place for their instruction; this aspect is 

appealing to teachers who are trying to balance their own training with classroom and home 

responsibilities (Beer, 2000; Brown, 2000; Lightfoot, 1998, 1999).  By changing the way 

professional development is delivered, students, educators, and administrators will each benefit.

School districts will be able to save money that is usually spent on substitute teachers. 

Administrators would be able to add additional student contact days to the school calendar by 

reducing the number of professional development days required for teacher training. 

Technology-based learning provides school districts a way to assess their staff members’ active 

participation in their professional development (Lightfoot, 1998, 1999).  As states face huge 

205

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

deficits and school districts continue to scramble to find the funding for professional staff 

development, TBL allows districts to the ability to reduce costs associated with training.  Savings 

would come from a reduction in travel expenses, instructor fees, facility costs, materials, and 

office equipment costs.  In addition, the cost of lost job time that occurs when teachers are in 

training would be saved.  Technology-based learning saves districts an average of $1,500 per 

employee annually (Beer, 2000; Brown & Duguid, 1996; Driscoll, 1999; Herrington et al., 1996; 

Pollack, 1996; Philips, 1999). 

It is commonly accepted among educators that there is not just one way in which all 

students learn; each learner is unique and has his/her own learning style (Beer, 2000; Brown & 

Duguid, 1996; Driscoll, 1999; Herrington et al., 1996; Philips, 1999; Pollack, 1996). 

How   do   learners   learn   best?     Trainers   and   educators   often   ask   this 
question.  The answer invariably is that it depends on the learning context 
and the individual’s learning style.  Getting information when we want it, 
where   we   want   it,   and   in   a   way   that   is   meaningful   to   us   can   have 
significant effects on both our willingness and our ability to learn.  (Chute 
et al., 1999, p. 205) 

It is illogical to conclude that there is a single mode of instructional delivery that will effectively 

reach all potential learners.  Technology-based learning was not designed to replace universities 

or instructor-led learning.  Due to the complexity of human learning, the need for face-to-face 

communication will not be eliminated.  In order to be effective, TBL must offer a balance 

between virtual interaction (between the learner and the material) and real-time interaction 

(between the instructor and the students) (Weinstein, 1997).  Technology-based learning offers a 

methodology of instruction that can be used by the teacher and the students.   

206

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Regardless   of   how   one   feels   about   TBL,   WBT   and/or   other   distance 
learning technologies used in education, they are here to stay.  Educators 
will   continue   utilizing   TBL  in   their   classrooms   to   enhance   how   they 
deliver   instruction   that   fosters   students’  learning.     School   districts   and 
educators   are   discovering   that   the   type   of   training   programs   currently 
offered are not representative of how adults optimally learn.  Learning can 
no longer be confined within the four walls of a classroom.  An instructor 
armed with a textbook will no longer be the sole source of knowledge and 
educational experiences.  Information resources will be everywhere, often 
separated from learners by time and space.  (Chute et al., 1999, p. 204)  

Through TBL, states and school districts can begin to eliminate the educational and 

instructional problems facing schools.  When school districts and administrators implement 

technology-based instruction, they provide their staff members with an effective way to 

collaborate with colleagues elsewhere.  This type of professional development affords educators 

a viable way of sharing their knowledge and expertise with others in the same field.  Technology-

based learning may provide learning environments that allow educators and other staff members 

to become life-long learners.  Using technology as a strategy for training teachers and others in 

education may ultimately benefit not only the individual learner, but the organization as a whole. 

207

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Tolerance Education: Changing Our World One Child at a Time!

Technology-based Learning Course Model 

Rationale

As of September 2002, Kenosha Unified School District, also known as "the District," the 

third largest school district in Wisconsin, enrolled over 21,000 students.  The District offered its 

Language Assistance Programs (LAPs) services to over 1,300 LEP students at all grade levels 

(KUSD, 2003).  Enrollment data were retrieved from Wisconsin’s “Third Friday in September 

Enrollment Count.”  In March 2003, the District identified and assessed an additional 700+ LEP 

students due to the "No Child Left Behind Act of 2001.”  The District has continuously enrolled 

ten to fifteen new LEP students per month (KUSD, 2003).  

In addition, the District has had various complaints filed with the Office of Civil Rights 

(OCR) on behalf of its LEP student population.  In July 2002, the District reached an agreement 

with OCR (termed the Action Plan).  Part of the Action Plan mandated that the District provide 

professional development to teachers on effective instructional strategies for mainstreaming LEP 

students, as stipulated by OCR.  Based upon the preliminary results of the training sessions, the 

District’s staff indicated a need for additional professional development in the area of diversity 

education and/or cultural sensitivity training.  The District is now mandating all its employees to 

attend this staff development on diversity education and/or cultural sensitivity training.  The 

District has made a concerted effort to train its staff on these issues, but due to time constraints 

208

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

and funding, it has not been able to reach and train all of its staff members.  Currently, the district 

has two ESL certified “classroom” teachers to train all of the staff members.  These two teachers 

team-teach within the same classroom.  Additionally, these teachers must attend various meetings 

and/or training sessions during school hours and rely on substitute teachers to teach their students 

in their absence.    

In order to assist in this endeavor, a technology-based learning model course was 

developed for the District to train the entire staff.  Prior to creating this course, the District’s 

technology team met to discuss the District’s available technology resources and to determine 

whether a model was feasible and/or reasonable.  It was determined from this meeting that the 

District has the capabilities to incorporate a WBT/CBT on its Intranet-Advisory Board, but has 

never attempted to do so.  Based on the information gained from various educational courses at 

Capella University, a model was created for a TBL program on Tolerance Education for KUSD. 

The District administrators will be consulted to determine content changes.  Also, the 

administrators will arrange for implementation of the TBL course in the Fall 2003- 2004.    

 

209

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Tolerance Education: Changing Our World One Child at a Time!

Technology-based Learning Course Model 

Designed for Kenosha Unified School District No. 1, Kenosha, Wisconsin

Step 1: To access the web-based training site, utilize the following link:

http://scjven.puertasdebabel.org/ell/email.htm

Step 2:  Input the username: Tolerance 

Step 3:  Input the password: education

* This program is case sensitive.  Please use the correct wording, and use of capitalization, 
or access will be denied.  

210

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

References

Barr, R., & Tagg, J. (1995, November/December). From teaching to learning: A new paradigm 

for undergraduate education. Change, 13-25.

Beer, V. (2000). The web learning fieldbook. Using the World Wide Web to build workplace 

learning environments. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass- Pfeiffer.

Borsuk, A. (2002). Virtual schools hit turbulence in state-One delayed by lack of charter, second 

challenged by teachers union.  Journal Sentinel. Retrieved May 27, 2003, from 
http://www.jsonline.com/news/metro/aug02/64523.asp.

Boshier, R., Wilson, M., & Qayyum, A. (1999). Lifelong education and the World Wide Web: 

American hegemony or diverse Utopia? International Journal of Lifelong Education. 
Retrieved March 4, 2003, from http://www.edst.educ.ubc.ca/tern/Text/contact.htm.

Brandon, H. (1997).  Web-based training cookbook. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Brown, B.  (1998). Distance education and web-based training. ERIC Information Series No. 

379. ERIC Clearinghouse on Adult, Career, and Vocational Education, Columbus, OH. 
Retrieved March 4, 2003, from http://ericacve.org/majorpubs2.asp?ID=20.

Brown, B. (2000). Web-based training. ERIC Digest No. 218. ERIC Clearinghouse on Adult, 

Career, and Vocational Education, Columbus, OH. Retrieved March 4, 2003, from 
http://www.ericfacility.net/databases/ERIC_Digests/ed445234.html. 

Brown, J. S., & Duguid, P. (1996). Universities in the digital age. Part two: Business, commerce 

and services, Information Age Anthology. Retrieved March 4, 2003 from 
http:www.dodccrp.org/antch13.htm.

Buchanan, T. (1998-99). Using the World Wide Web for formative assessment. Journal 

Educational Technology Systems, 27(1).

Chute, A., Thompson, M., & Hancock, B. (1999). The McGraw-Hill handbook of distance 

learning.  New York: McGraw-Hill.

Dede, C. (1998). ASCD Yearbook-1998. Learning with technology. Alexandria: ASCD.

Desimone R., Werner, J., & Harris, D. (2002). Human resource development. Fort Worth: 

Harcourt College Publishing.

211

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

Department of Education, Office of Civil Rights –OCR (1999).  Retrieved October 22, 2002 

from http://www.ed.gov/offices/OCR/ELL/index.html.

Driscoll, M. (1999). Web-based training in the workplace.  Adult Learning, 10 (4), 21-25.

Driscoll, M. M. (1997). Defining Internet and web-based training. Performance and Instruction 

Journal, 36(4).

Dugan, S. (1998). Internet fuels training market. InfoWorld,

 

20(36).

 

Dunn, S.  (2000). The virtualizing of education. The Futurist, 34 (2). 

Eastmond, D. V. (1998). Adult learners and Internet-based distance education. Adult learning and 

the Internet, new directions for adult and continuing education, 78, 33-41.

Edelson, P. J. (1998). The organization of courses via the Internet, academic aspects, interaction, 

evaluation, and accreditation. Paper presented at the National Autonomous University of 
Mexico, Mexico City.  

Friedlander, M. (1991, Fall). The newcomer program: Helping immigrant students succeed in 

U.S. schools. NCBE Program Information Guide Series, No. 8.  Retrieved November 1, 
2002, from http://ncbe.gwu.edu/ncbepubs/pigs/pig8.htm; 
http://www.helpforschools.com/ELLKBase/refernces/NEWCOMERPROGRAMTableCo.

Gallego, G. (1998). The state-of-the-art in web-based training. Retrieved March 3, 2003 from 

http://gracespace.com/weblearn/.   

Gibson, C. (1992). Distance education: On focus and future. Adult Education Quarterly, 6(4). 

Giroux, S., Hotte, R., & Dao, K. (1997). Adaptive and agile learning environments on the 

WWW. In WebNet 97 Conference of the WWW, Internet, and Intranet Proceedings
Charlottesville, VA. Edited by S. Lobodzinski and I. Tomek. Charlottesville, VA: 
Association for the Advancement of Computing in Education, 1997. (ED 429 535). 

Hakuta, K. (1998). Improving education for all children: meeting the needs of language minority 

children. Retrieved August 6, 2002, from http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Aspen.html.

Hakuta, K. (2001, April 13). The education of language minority students. Paper presented at 

United States Commission on Civil Rights. Retrieved September 5, 2002, from 
http://www.standford.edu/~hakuta/Docs/CivilRightsCommision.htm.

Henke, H. (1997). Evaluating web-based instruction design. Retrieved March 3, 2003, from 

http://www.scis.nova.edu/~henkeh/story1.htm.

Herrington, J., Oliver, R., & Omari, A.,(1996).  Creating effective instructional materials for the 

212

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

World Wide Web. Retrieved March 2, 2003, from 
http://elmo.scu.edu.au/sponsored/ausweb/ausweb96/educn/oliver/.

Hoffman, B., & Ritchie, D. (1996). CSU instructional technology initiatives. Office of 

Chancellor: The California State University. Retrieved March 2, 2003, from 
http://edweb.sdsu.edu/clrit/learningtree/DCD/WWWInstrdesign/Instruction.html.

Imel, S. (1997). Web-based training: Trends and issues alerts. Columbus: ERIC Clearinghouse 

on Adult, Career, and Vocational Education, Center on Education and Training for 
Employment, Ohio State University. 

Jarvis P. (1987). Adult Learning in the Social Context. Croom Helm: London.

Kahn, R. (1997). 21

st

 century training.  Sales and marketing management. 146 (6).

Kenosha Unified School District Five-Year Long Range Committee (2003). Kenosha Unified 

School District No. 1, Kenosha, WI.  

  

Lawson, K. (1998). The trainer’s handbook. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass- Pfeiffer.

Lee, W., & Owens, D. (2000). Multimedia-based instructional design. Computer-based training, 

web-based training, distance broadcast training. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass- Pfeiffer. 

Leiden, C., & Wilensky, M. (2000). TCP/IP for dummies. (4

th

 ed.). New York: Hungry Minds, 

Inc.     

Lightfoot, J. (1998-99). A Blueprint for using the World Wide Web as an interactive teaching 

tool. Educational Technology Systems, 27(4). 

Lowrie, T. (1999). Policy innovations in the VET sector: The role of instructors in a competency-

based environment. Retrieved February 25, 2003, from 
http://www.aare.edu.au/99pap/low99164.htm.

McKenzie, J. (2001). How teachers learn technology best. Retrieved February 25, 2003, from 

http://staffdevelop.org/howteachrslearn.html.

Miliano, M., & Ullius, D. (1998). Designing powerful training. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass-

Pfeiffer. 

Phillips, J. (1999).  HRD trends worldwide.  Houston: Gulf Publishing Company.

Pollack, T. A. (1996). Distance learning and today’s educational environment. In association of 

213

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

small computer users in education summer conference proceedings, 29

th

, North Myrtle 

Beach, SC. 

Rah, K. Y., & Scuello, M. (1996). Computer aided statistics instruction protocol (CASIP) 

restructuring undergraduate statistics in psychology: An integration of computers into 
instruction and evaluation. Paper presented at 10

th

 Annual Conference on Undergraduate 

Teaching and Psychology, Psychology Department, Brooklyn College of the City 
University of New York.

Rowe, G., & Gregor, P. (1999). A computer-based learning system for teaching computing: 

Implementation and evaluation. Computers and Education.  

Silberman, M. (1998).  Active training. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass: Pfeiffer.

Sherry, L., & Wilson, B. (1997).  Transformative communication as a stimulus to web 

innovations.  B. Khan (Ed.), Web-based instruction. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Educational 
Technology Publications. 

Short, D. (1998).  Secondary Newcomers programs: Helping recent immigrants prepare for 

school success. ERIC Digest (ED#411703). Washington, DC: ERIC Clearinghouse on 
Languages and Linguistics, from 

http://www.cal.org/crede/newcomer.htm

.

Tergan, S. (1997). Conceptual and methodological shortcomings in hypertext/hypermedia design 

and research. Journal of Educational Computing Research. 

Viadero, D. (2000, May). Bridging the gap. Teacher Magazine, 11(8).

Vondanovich, S., and Piotrowski, C. (1999-2000).  An Internet-based approach to legal issues in 

industrial-organizational psychology.  Journal of Educational and Technology Systems, 
26 
(1). 

Weinstein, P. (1997).  Education goes the distance: Overview. Technology & learning,

 17 (8).

Wilson, B., & Lowry, M. (1998). Constructivist learning happens all the time on the web. In 

learning technologies: Reflective and strategic thinking, new directions for adult and 
continuing education.
 Edited by E. Burge. San Francisco, CA: Jossey–Bass.   

Wonacott, M. E. (2000). Web-based training and constructivism. In brief: Fast facts for policy 

and practice. (2). Retrieved March 2, 2003, from 
http://www.nccte.org/publications/infosynthesis/in-brief/in-brief02/index.asp.  

Wright, S. W. (1998). The distance learning explosion. Community College Week.
Yang, S. C. (2001). Synergy of constructivism and hypermedia from three constructivist 

214

background image

Comprehensive Paper for (Patricia A. Alvara)

perspectives- Social, semiotic, and cognitive.  Journal of Educational Computing 
Research, 24 
(4).  

Young, J. R. (1997). Information technology: Rethinking the role of the professor in an age of 

high-tech tools. Chronicle of Higher Education, 44 (6).

 

215


Document Outline